Asus Motherboard P5MT-S Owner's Manual
Motherboard P5MT-S
i i E 2 3 7 6 F i r s t E d i t i o n J a n u a r y 2 0 0 6 Copyright é 2006 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiï¬Âed or altered, unless such repair, modiï¬Âcation of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âÂÂAS ISâ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT. SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY, AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identiï¬Âcation or explanation and to the ownersü beneï¬Ât, without intent to infringe.
i i i Contents Notices ............................................................................................... vii Safety information ............................................................................. viii About this guide .................................................................................. ix Typography .......................................................................................... x P5MT-S speciï¬Âcations summary .......................................................... xi C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 Innovative ASUS features ....................................... 1-4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 Onboard LEDs ....................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 Placement direction ................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Screw holes ............................................................. 2-2 2.2.3 Motherboard layout ................................................ 2-3 2.2.4 Layout Contents ..................................................... 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-6 2.3.1 Installing the CPU .................................................... 2-6 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan ......................... 2-9 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan ................... 2-11 2.4 System memory .................................................................. 2-13 2.4.1 Overview ............................................................... 2-13 2.4.2 Memory Conï¬Âgurations ......................................... 2-13 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ................................................... 2-14 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM .................................................. 2-14 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-15 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card .................................. 2-15 2.5.2 Conï¬Âguring an expansion card .............................. 2-15 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments ........................................... 2-16 2.5.4 PCI/PCI-X slots ...................................................... 2-17 2.5.5 PCI Express x16 slot ............................................. 2-17 2.5.6 Mini PCI socket ...................................................... 2-17
i v Contents 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-18 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-23 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .......................................... 2-23 2.7.2 Internal connectors ............................................... 2-24 C h a p t e r 3 : P o w e r i n g u p 3.1 Starting up for the ï¬Ârst time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer ................................................... 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function ........................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch ..................... 3-2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk .............................. 4-1 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility ........................................................ 4-2 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ................................ 4-5 4.1.4 ASUS Update utility ................................................ 4-7 4.2 BIOS setup program ............................................................ 4-10 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ................................................. 4-11 4.2.2 Menu bar ............................................................... 4-11 4.2.3 Navigation keys ..................................................... 4-11 4.2.4 Menu items ........................................................... 4-12 4.2.5 Sub-menu items .................................................... 4-12 4.2.6 Conï¬Âguration ï¬Âelds ............................................... 4-12 4.2.7 Pop-up window ...................................................... 4-12 4.2.8 Scroll bar ............................................................... 4-12 4.2.9 General help .......................................................... 4-12 4.3 Main menu ........................................................................... 4-13 4.3.1 System Time ........................................................ 4-13 4.3.2 System Date ........................................................ 4-13 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ............................................... 4-13 4.3.4 IDE Conï¬Âguration .................................................. 4-14 4.3.5 Primary, Third, Fourth Master/Slave ..................... 4-15 4.3.6 System Information .............................................. 4-17 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-18 4.4.1 MPS Conï¬Âguration ................................................. 4-18
v Contents 4.4.2 CPU Conï¬Âguration ................................................. 4-19 4.4.3 Chipset Conï¬Âguration ........................................... 4-21 4.4.4 Onboard Devices Conï¬Âguration ............................. 4-25 4.4.5 PCI PnP .................................................................. 4-26 4.5 Power Conï¬Âguration ........................................................... 4-27 4.5.1 APM Conï¬Âguration ................................................ 4-27 4.5.2 Hardware Monitor .................................................. 4-30 4.6 Server menu ....................................................................... 4-32 Remote Access Conï¬Âguration ............................................. 4-32 4.7 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-34 4.7.1 Boot Device Priority .............................................. 4-34 4.7.2 Boot Settings Conï¬Âguration ................................. 4-35 4.7.3 Security ................................................................. 4-36 4.8 Exit menu ............................................................................ 4-39 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5.1 Setting up RAID .................................................................... 5-1 5.1.1 RAID deï¬Ânitions ....................................................... 5-1 5.1.2 Installing hard disk drives ........................................ 5-2 5.1.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS ................................. 5-2 5.1.4 RAID conï¬Âguration utility ........................................ 5-3 5.2 LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility ...................... 5-4 5.2.1 Creating a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set ............................. 5-5 5.2.2 Creating a RAID 10 set ......................................... 5-11 5.2.3 Adding or viewing a RAID conï¬Âguration ................ 5-15 5.2.4 Initializing the logical drives .................................. 5-18 5.2.5 Rebuilding failed drives ......................................... 5-23 5.2.6 Checking the drives for data consistency ............. 5-25 5.2.7 Deleting a RAID conï¬Âguration ............................... 5-28 5.2.8 Selecting the boot drive from a RAID set ............. 5-29 5.2.9 Enabling the WriteCache ....................................... 5-30 5.3 Global Array Manager .......................................................... 5-30 5.4 Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility .......................................... 5-31 5.4.1 Conï¬Âguring the SCSI controller ............................. 5-32 5.4.2 Enabling the HostRAID controller .......................... 5-32 5.4.3 Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) .............................. 5-33
v i 5.4.4 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) .............................. 5-37 5.4.5 Creating a RAID 10 set (Stripe Mirror) ................ 5-40 5.4.6 Adding a spare drive to a RAID 10 set ................. 5-44 5.4.7 Deleting a RAID 10 set spare drive ....................... 5-45 5.4.8 Deleting a RAID set ............................................... 5-47 5.4.9 Rebuilding a RAID set ............................................ 5-48 5.4.10 Verifying a RAID set hard disk drive ..................... 5-49 5.4.11 Making a RAID set bootable .................................. 5-50 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6.1 RAID driver installation .......................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk ..................................... 6-1 6.1.2 Installing the RAID controller driver ........................ 6-2 6.2 LAN driver installation ........................................................ 6-11 6.2.1 Windows î 2000/2003 Server .............................. 6-11 6.2.2 Red Hat î Enterprise ver. 3.0 ................................. 6-12 6.3 VGA driver installation ........................................................ 6-13 6.3.1 Windows î 2000 Server ......................................... 6-13 6.3.2 Windows î 2003 Server ......................................... 6-14 6.3.3 Red Hat î Enterprise ver. 3.0 ................................. 6-14 6.4 Management applications and utilities installation .............. 6-15 6.4.1 Running the support CD ........................................ 6-15 6.4.2 Drivers menu ......................................................... 6-15 6.4.3 Management Software menu ................................ 6-16 6.4.4 Utilities menu ........................................................ 6-16 6.4.5 Contact information ............................................. 6-16 A p p e n d i x : R e f e r e n c e i n f o r m a t i o n A.1 Intel î EM64T ......................................................................... A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) .................... A-1 A.2.1 System requirements .............................................. A-1 A.2.2 Using the EIST ......................................................... A-2 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ...................................... A-3 A.4 Block diagram ....................................................................... A-4
v i i Notices F e d e r a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s C o m m i s s i o n S t a t e m e n t This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerüs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. C a n a d i a n D e p a r t m e n t o f C o m m u n i c a t i o n s S t a t e m e n t This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiï¬Âcations to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userüs authority to operate this equipment.
v i i i Safety information E l e c t r i c a l s a f e t y ⢠To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adapter or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to fix it by yourself. Contact a qualified service technician or your retailer. O p e r a t i o n s a f e t y ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately. ⢠To avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry. ⢠Avoid dust, humidity, and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualified service technician or your retailer. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product (electrical and electronic equipment) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products.
i x About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and conï¬Âguring the motherboard. H o w t h i s g u i d e i s o r g a n i z e d This manual contains the following parts: ⢠C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠C h a p t e r 3 : P o w e r i n g u p This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p Tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n Provides information on RAID conï¬Âgurations for this motherboard. ⢠C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n This chapter provides information on RAID and LAN driver installation for this motherboard. ⢠A p p e n d i x : R e f e r e n c e i n f o r m a t i o n This appendix includes additional information that you may refer to when conï¬Âguring the motherboard. W h e r e t o f i n d m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1 . A S U S w e b s i t e s The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2 . O p t i o n a l d o c u m e n t a t i o n Your product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty ï¬Âyers, that may have been added by your dealer. These documents are not part of the standard package.
x C o n v e n t i o n s u s e d i n t h i s g u i d e To make sure that you perform certain tasks properly, take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. Typography Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater-than sign means that you must press the enclosed key. Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key. <Key1> <Key2> <Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl> <Alt> <Del> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: format A:/S DANGER/WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: Tips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORTANT: Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.
x i P5MT-S speciï¬Âcations summary (continued on the next page) C P U C h i p s e t F r o n t S i d e B u s M e m o r y E x p a n s i o n s l o t s * S t o r a g e G r a p h i c s D u a l L A N LGA775 socket for Intel î Pentium î 4/processor Compatible with Intel î PCG 05B/05A and 04B/04A and the latest Intel î dual-core processor Su pp or ts I n te l î E nh an ce d Mem or y 6 4 T ec hno log y (EM 64T ) Supports Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) Supports Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology NorthBridge: Intel î E7230 SouthBridge: Intel î ICH7R I/O bridge : Intel î 6702 PXH-V 1066/800/533 MHz Dual-channel memory architecture 4 x 240-pin DIMM sockets support unbuffered ECC/non-ECC DDR2-533/667 memory modules Supports up to 8 GB system memory 1 x PCI Express x16 slot (x8 link, PCI Express 1.0a) 1 x PCI-X 100 MHz/64-bit slot (PCI-X 1.0) (supports Zero-Channel RAID card, colored green on the model) 1 x PCI-X 100 MHz/64-bit slot (PCI-X 1.0) 1 x PCI 33 MHz/32-bit/5V slot (PCI 2.3) 1 x mini-PCI socket for ASUS î Server Management Board Intel î ICH7R Southbridge supports: - 2 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 hard disk drives - 4 x SATA-300 drives with RAID functionality using the Intel Matrix Storage Manager (under Windows Operating system) or IMSM (RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, and RAID 5), or the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID controller (RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10) Adaptec î AIC-7901X PCI-X SCSI controller supports: - 1 x Ultra-320 SCSI channel with RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 10 conï¬Âguration - Zero-Channel RAID card (optional) ATI î RAGE-XL PCI-based VGA controller Du al e mb ed ded B roa dco m BCM 572 1 Gig abi t LAN co nt ro ll er s t ha t c omp ly wi th PC I Ex pr es s 1. 0a s pe ci ï¬Âc at io ns *Important notes: ⢠A PCI Express x 16 graphics card inserted to the PCI Express x16 slot may run only at x1 speed (Intel spec). ⢠When one PCI-X slot is occupied, the PCI-X frequency is 100 MHz. When two PCI-X slots are occupied, the PCI-X frequency is 66 MHz.
x i i P5MT-S speciï¬Âcations summary U S B S p e c i a l f e a t u r e s B I O S f e a t u r e s R e a r p a n e l I n t e r n a l c o n n e c t o r s P o w e r R e q u i r e m e n t F o r m F a c t o r S u p p o r t C D c o n t e n t s Intel ICH7R Southbridge supports: - 4 USB 2.0 ports (two on the rear panel, two on the front panel) ASUS Smart Fan I/II ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS MyLogo2 AMI BIOS, 8 MB Flash ROM, Green, PnP, DMI, SMBIOS 2.3, WfM2.0, ACPI 2.0a 1 x PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 1 x PS/2 mouse port (green) 2 x USB 2.0 ports 1 x Parallel port 1 x Serial port (COM1) 1 x VGA port 2 x LAN (RJ-45) ports 1 x Floppy disk drive connector 1 x IDE connector 4 x Serial ATA connectors 1 x Hard disk activity LED connector 1 x 68-pin SCSI connector 2 x Front fan connectors 2 x Rear fan connectors 2 x CPU fan connectors 1 x 24-pin ATX power connector 1 x 8-pin ATX 12 V power connector 1 x Power supply SMBUS connector 1 x Serial port (COM2) 1 x USB 2.0 connector for 2 additional USB 2.0 ports 1 x SMBus header for back-plane 1 x 20-1 pin auxiliary panel connector 1 x 20-1 pin system panel connector 1 x Serial port (COM2) connector 1 x ASUS server management (BMC) connector SSI power supply (with 24-pin and 8-pin 12 V plugs) ATX 12 V 2.0 compliant ATX form factor: 12 in x 9.8 in (30.5 cm x 24.9 cm) Device drivers ASUS Live Update utility ASUS Server Web-based Management (ASWM) Anti-virus software *Speciï¬Âcations are subject to change without notice.
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
A S U S P 5 M T - S Chapter summary 1 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2
A S U S P 5 M T - S 1 - 1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS î P5MT-S motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below. 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. Motherboard ASUS P5MT-S motherboard Cables 4 x Serial ATA signal cables 2 x Serial ATA power cables 1 x SCSI Ultra320 cable 80-conductor IDE cable 3-in-1 Floppy/Ultra ATA disk drive cable Accessories I/O shield Application CDs ASUS motherboard support CD Documentation User guide If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer.
1 - 2 C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n 1.3 Special features 1 . 3 . 1 P r o d u c t h i g h l i g h t s L a t e s t p r o c e s s o r t e c h n o l o g y The motherboard comes with a 775-pin surface mount Land Grid Array (LGA) socket designed for the Intel î Pentium î 4 processor in the 775-land package. The motherboard supports the Intel î Pentium î 4 processor with 1066/800/533 MHz Front Side Bus (FSB). The motherboard also supports the Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology and is fully compatible with Intel î 05B/05A or 04B/04A processors. See page 2-6 for details. I n t e l î E M 6 4 T The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 CPUs with the Intel î EM64T (Extended Memory 64 Technology). The Intel î EM64T feature allows your computer to run on 64-bit operating systems and access larger amounts of system memory for faster and more efï¬Âcient computing. See the Appendix for details. E n h a n c e d I n t e l S p e e d S t e p î T e c h n o l o g y ( E I S T ) The Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) intelligently manages the CPU resources by automatically adjusting the CPU voltage and core frequency depending on the CPU loading and system speed or power requirement. See page 4-20 and the Appendix for details. I n t e l î E 7 2 3 0 a n d I n t e l î I C H 7 R c h i p s e t The Intel î E7230 Memory Controller Hub (MCH) and the Intel î ICH7R (I/O controller hub) provide the vital interfaces for the motherboard. Th e M CH pro vid es the pr oce sso r, dua l-c han nel DD R2- 533/667 me mor y, and PC I E xpr ess in ter fac es. Th e I CH is a n ew gen era tio n s erv er cla ss I/O co ntr oll er hu b t hat pr ovi des th e i nte rfa ce for PC I 2 .3, US B 2 .0 , and SA TA amo ng oth ers . D D R 2 - 6 6 7 m e m o r y s u p p o r t Th e m oth erb oar d s upp ort s D DR2 memory which features data transfer rates of up to 667 MHz to meet the higher bandwidth requirements of the latest server applications. The dual-channel memory architecture doubles the bandwidth of your system memory to boost system performance, eliminating bottlenecks with peak bandwidths of up to 10.7 GB/s. P C I E x p r e s s ⢠i n t e r f a c e Th e m oth erb oar d f ull y s upp ort s P CI Exp res s, the latest I/O interconnect technology that speeds up the PCI bus. PCI Express features point-to-point serial interconnections between devices and allows higher clockspeeds by carrying data in packets. This high speed interface is software compatible with existing PCI or PCI-X speciï¬Âcations. See page 2-17 for details.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 1 - 3 U l t r a 3 2 0 S C S I f e a t u r e The Adaptec î AIC-7901X PCI-X SCSI controller is onboard to support one 68-pin Ultra320 SCSI connector, that can connect up to 15 SCSI devices. See page 2-27 and Chapter 5 for details. Z e r o - C h a n n e l R A I D ( Z C R ) c a r d s o l u t i o n The motherboard comes with a PCI-X slot (the green slot on the model) that supports an optional Zero-Channel RAID card. The Zero-Channel RAID card allows you to create all types of RAID conï¬Âgurations for your storage devices. The ZCR capability provides a cost-effective, high-performance, and added reliability for your server system. G i g a b i t L A N s o l u t i o n The motherboard comes with dual Gigabit LAN controllers and ports to provide a total solution for your networking needs. The onboard Broadcom î BCM5721 Gigabit LAN controllers use the PCI Express interface and could achieve network throughput close to Gigabit bandwidth. See page 2-23 for details. S e r i a l A T A I I t e c h n o l o g y The mo the rbo ard su ppo rts th e S eri al ATA II technology through the Serial ATA interfaces controlled by the Intel î ICH7R. The SATA speciï¬Âcation allows for thinner, more ï¬Âexible cables with lower pin count, reduced voltage requirement, and up to 300 MB/s data transfer rate. B u i l t - i n S A T A R A I D s o l u t i o n The Intel î ICH7R allows RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and RAID 5 conï¬Âguration for SATA hard disk drives via the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager (under Windows Operating System) or the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility (no RAID 5). See page 2-25 and Chapter 5 for details. U S B 2 . 0 t e c h n o l o g y The motherboard implements the Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 speciï¬Âcation, dramatically increasing the connection speed from the 12 Mbps bandwidth on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. See pages 2-23 and 2-26 for details.
1 - 4 C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n T e m p e r a t u r e , f a n , a n d v o l t a g e m o n i t o r i n g The CPU temperature is monitored by the ASIC (integrated in the Winbond hardware monitor) to prevent overheating and damage. The system fan rotations per minute (RPM) is monitored for timely failure detection. The ASIC monitors the voltage levels to ensure stable supply of current for critical components. See page 4-30 for details. 1 . 3 . 2 I n n o v a t i v e A S U S f e a t u r e s C r a s h F r e e B I O S 2 Th is fea tur e a llo ws you to re sto re the or igi nal BI OS dat a f rom th e s upp ort CD in ca se whe n t he BIO S c ode s a nd dat a a re cor rup ted . T his pr ote cti on el imi nat es the ne ed to buy a rep lac eme nt ROM ch ip. Se e p age 4-5 for details. A S U S S m a r t F a n t e c h n o l o g y I / I I The motherboard supports both generations of ASUS Smart Fan technology. ASUS Smart Fan technology smartly adjusts the fan speeds according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efï¬Âcient operation. See page 4- 31 for details. A S U S M y L o g o 2 ⢠This new feature present in the motherboard allows you to personalize and add style to your system with customizable boot logos. See page 4-35 for details.
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
A S U S P 5 M T - S Chapter summary 2 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-6 2.4 System memory .................................................................. 2-13 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-15 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-18 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-23
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 1 Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED. The green LED lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. 2.1 Before you proceed Take note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity. ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the ATX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, or components, or all of the above articles. P5MT-S î P5MT-S Onboard LED SB_PWR1 OFF Powered Off ON Standby Power
2 - 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the conï¬Âguration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard ï¬Âts into it. To optimize the motherboard features, we highly recommend that you install it in an SSI EEB 3.5 compliant chassis. Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage to the motherboard components. 2 . 2 . 1 P l a c e m e n t d i r e c t i o n When installing the motherboard, make sure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below. 2 . 2 . 2 S c r e w h o l e s Place nine (9) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. P l a c e t h i s s i d e t o w a r d s t h e r e a r o f t h e c h a s s i s Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. P5MT-S LAN2 î
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 3 2 . 2 . 3 M o t h e r b o a r d l a y o u t P5MT-S 8Mbit Flash BIOS Super I/O PRI_IDE1 25cm (9.8in) 30.5cm (12in) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) SAT A1 A TI RAGE XL VGA Controller AUX_PANEL1 KBPWR1 PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: Keyboard LAN1 LAN2 î USB12 COM1 P ARALLEL PORT VGA1 PCIE1 PCIX3 PCIX2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 SAT A2 SAT A3 SAT A4 PANEL1 RECOVERY1 USB34 USBPW34 HDLED1 BUZZ1 FLOPPY1 BMCCONN1 TRPWR1 BPSMB1 VGA_EN1 SB_PWR1 COM2 LAN_EN2 LAN_EN1 Broadcom BCM5721 Broadcom BCM5721 Intel E7230 Intel 6702 PXH Intel ICH7R BMCSOCKET1 LAN2 LGA775 PCI4 PSUSMB1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power USBPW12 REAR_FAN1 ATX12V2 FM_CPU2 CPU_FAN2 FM_CPU1 CPU_FAN1 CLRTC1 A TXPWR1 REAR_FAN2 RAID_SEL1 Adaptec AIC-7901X SCSI_EN1 SCSIA1
2 - 4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . 2 . 4 L a y o u t c o n t e n t s R e a r p a n e l c o n n e c t o r s P a g e 1. PS/2 mouse port (green) 2-23 2. Parallel port 2-23 3. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 2-23 4. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 2-23 5. Serial (COM1) port 2-23 6. VGA port 2-23 7. Gigabit LAN1 (RJ-45) port 2-23 8. Gigabit LAN2 (RJ-45) port 2-23 S l o t s / S o c k e t s P a g e 1. CPU socket 2-6 2. DDR2 DIMM slots 2-13 3. PCI/PCI-X/PCI Express slots 2-17 4. Mini-PCI socket 2-17 J u m p e r s P a g e 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) 2-18 2. CPU fan pin selection (3-pin FM_CPU1, FM_CPU2) 2-19 3. USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW1, USBPW2) 2-19 4. Keyboard/Mouse power (3-pin KBPWR1) 2-20 5. VGA controller setting (3-pin VGA_EN1) 2-20 6. Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN_EN1; LAN_EN2) 2-21 7. RAID controller selection (3-pin RAID_SEL1) 2-21 8. SCSI controller setting (3-pin SCSI_EN1) 2-22 9. Force BIOS recovery setting (3-pin RECOVERY1) 2-22
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 5 I n t e r n a l c o n n e c t o r s P a g e 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) 2-24 2. Primary IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) 2-24 3. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) 2-25 4. Hard disk activity LED connector (4-pin HDLED1) 2-26 5. USB connector (10-1 pin USB34) 2-26 6. Ultra320 SCSI connector (68-pin SCSIA1) 2-27 7. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) 2-28 8. BMC connector (16-pin BMCCONN1) 2-28 9. Ambient thermal sensor (2-pin TRPWR1) 2-28 10. CPU and system fan connectors (3-pin CPU_FAN1/2, 2-29 REAR_FAN1/2, FRNT_FAN1/2) 11. Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) 2-29 12. Power supply SMBus connector (5-pin PSUSMB1) 2-30 13. SSI power connectors (24-pin ATXPWR1, 8-pin ATX12V2) 2-30 14. Auxiliary panel connector (20-pin AUX_PANEL1) 2-31 15. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) 2-32
2 - 6 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . 3 . 1 I n s t a l l i n g t h e C P U To install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel î Pentium î 4 in the 775-land package. Before installing the CPU, make sure that the cam box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. ⢠Upon purchase of the motherboard, make sure that the PnP cap is on the socket and the socket contacts are not bent. Contact your retailer immediately if the PnP cap is missing, or if you see any damage to the PnP cap/socket contacts/motherboard components. ASUS shoulders the repair cost only if the damage is shipment/ transit-related. ⢠Keep the cap after installing the motherboard. ASUS will process Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) requests only if the motherboard comes with the cap on the LGA775 socket. ⢠The product warranty does not cover damage to the socket contacts resulting from incorrect CPU installation/removal, or misplacement/loss/incorrect removal of the PnP cap. P5MT-S CPU Socket 775 P5MT-S î
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 7 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135ú angle. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and foreï¬Ânger to a 100ú angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket. The socket alignment key should ï¬Ât into the CPU notch. A l i g n m e n t k e y G o l d t r i a n g l e m a r k L o a d p l a t e A B 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. R e t e n t i o n t a b L o a d l e v e r T h i s s i d e o f t h e s o c k e t b o x s h o u l d f a c e y o u . P n P c a p A B To prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU.
2 - 8 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n The CPU ï¬Âts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. A B The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with the Intel î Enhanced Memory 64 Technology (EM64T), Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST), and Hyper-Threading Technology. Refer to the Appendix for more information on these CPU features.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 9 F a s t e n e r M o t h e r b o a r d h o l e 2 . 3 . 2 I n s t a l l i n g t h e C P U h e a t s i n k a n d f a n The Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. To install the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four fasteners match the holes on the motherboard. N a r r o w e n d o f t h e g r o o v e ⢠When you buy a boxed Intel î Pentium î 4 processor, the package includes the CPU fan and heatsink assembly. ⢠Your Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 heatsink and fan assembly comes in a push-pin design and requires no tool to install. ⢠If you purchased a separate CPU heatsink and fan assembly, make sure that you have properly applied Thermal Interface Material to the CPU heatsink or CPU before you install the heatsink and fan assembly. ⢠Make sure that you use Intel î -certiï¬Âed multi-directional heatsink and fan only. ⢠Make sure that you have installed the motherboard to the chassis before you install the CPU fan and heatsink assembly. Make sure to orient each fastener with the narrow end of the groove pointing outward. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) Orient the heatsink and fan assembly such that the CPU fan cable is closest to the CPU fan connector.
2 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 3. Connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_FAN1/CPU_FAN2. 2. Push down two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to secure the heatsink and fan assembly in place. B B A A A B B A P5M T-S î C PU_FAN1 CPU_ FAN2 P 5MT -S CP U Fan Con nect ors G ND F ANPW R PWM CPU_ F AN2 C PU_ F AN1 GN D F AN PWR PW M R otatio n Rotation ⢠Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector. ⢠If there is only one CPU fan cable, connect it to the connector labeled CPU_FAN1. Failure to do so may cause hardware monitoring errors. Set the CPU fan pin selection jumper to use a 3-pin or 4-pin fan cable plug. Refer to âÂÂ2.6 Jumpersâ for deatails.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 1 1 2 . 3 . 3 U n i n s t a l l i n g t h e C P U h e a t s i n k a n d f a n To uninstall the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Disconnect the CPU fan cable from the connector on the motherboard. 2. Rotate each fastener counterclockwise. 3. Pull up two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to disengage the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard. B B A A A A B B 4. Carefully remove the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard.
2 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 5. Rotate each fastener clockwise to ensure correct orientation when reinstalling. The narrow end of the groove should point outward after resetting. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) N a r r o w e n d o f t h e g r o o v e Refer to the documentation in the boxed or stand-alone CPU fan package for detailed information on CPU fan installation.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 1 3 2.4 System memory 2 . 4 . 1 O v e r v i e w The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR2 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR DIMM but has a 240-pin footprint compared to the 184-pin DDR DIMM. DDR2 DIMMs are notched differently to prevent installation on a DDR DIMM socket. The ï¬Âgure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: 2 . 4 . 2 M e m o r y c o n f i g u r a t i o n s You may install 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, and 2 GB unbuffered ECC or non-ECC DDR2-533/667 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency. For optimum compatibility, we recommend that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor. Refer to the DDR2 Qualiï¬Âed Vendors List on the ASUS web site. ⢠When installing one or two DIMMs, install the DIMM(s) to the blue slots (DIMM_A2/DIMM_B2). ⢠Three DDR2 DIMMs intalled into any three memory sockets will function in single-channel mode. P5MT-S 240-pin DDR2 DIMM Sockets DIMM_A1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_A2 1 12 Pins 128 Pins P5MT-S î
2 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . 4 . 3 I n s t a l l i n g a D I M M Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. To install a DIMM: 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2 . 4 . 4 R e m o v i n g a D I M M Follow these steps to remove a DIMM. 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it ï¬Âts in only one direction. DO NOT force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. DO NOT install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Support the DIMM lightly with your ï¬Ângers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it ï¬Âips out with extra force. U n l o c k e d r e t a i n i n g c l i p D D R 2 D I M M n o t c h 1 2 3 D D R 2 D I M M n o t c h 1 2 1
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 1 5 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2 . 5 . 1 I n s t a l l i n g a n e x p a n s i o n c a r d To install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press ï¬Ârmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier. 6. Replace the system cover. 2 . 5 . 2 C o n f i g u r i n g a n e x p a n s i o n c a r d After installing the expansion card, conï¬Âgure it by adjusting the software settings. 1. Turn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any. See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage to the motherboard components. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âÂÂShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conï¬Âicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable. Refer to the table on the next page for details.
2 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . 5 . 3 I n t e r r u p t a s s i g n m e n t s I R Q P r i o r i t y S t a n d a r d F u n c t i o n 0 1 System Timer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 â Re-direct to IRQ#9 3* 11 Communications Port (COM2) 4* 12 Communications Port (COM1) 5* 13 IRQ holder for PCI steering 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7* 15 Printer Port (LPT1) 8 3 System CMOS/Real Time Clock 9* 4 IRQ holder for PCI steering 10* 5 IRQ holder for PCI steering 11* 6 IRQ holder for PCI steering 12* 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel 15 10 Secondary IDE Channel * These IRQs are usually available for ISA or PCI devices. D e s c r i p t i o n I N T A I N T B I N T C I N T D R E Q # G N T # PATA Controller PIRQA# â â â â â SATA Controller PIRQD# â â â â â SMBus Controller PIRQB# â â â â USB1 UHCI Controller #1 PIRQH# â â â â USB1 UHCI Controller #2 PIRQD# â â â â â USB 2.0 EHCI Controller PIRQH# â â â â â BMC5721 #1 PIRQA# â â â â â BMC5721 #2 PIRQB# â â â â â ATI RAGE XL PIRQD# â â â REQ1# GNT1# Adaptec 7901 PXIRQ2 â â â PXREQ2 PXGNT2 PCI Express Slot 1 (x16) PIRQA# â â â â â PCIX Slot 2 (64-bit) PXIRQ0 PXIRQ1 PXIRQ2 PXIRQ3 PXREQ0 PXGNT0 PCIX Slot 3 (64-bit) PXIRQ4 PXIRQ5 PXIRQ6 PXIRQ7 PXREQ1 PXGNT1 PCI Slot 4 (32-bit) PIRQE# PIRQF# PIRQG# PIRQH# REQ0# GNT0# S t a n d a r d i n t e r r u p t a s s i g n m e n t s P C I B u s N u m b e r , I D S E L , a n d I R Q a s s i g n m e n t s
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 1 7 2 . 5 . 5 P C I E x p r e s s x 1 6 s l o t This motherboard supports PCI Express x16 graphics cards that comply with the PCI Express speciï¬Âcations. The ï¬Âgure shows a graphics card installed on the PCI Express x16 slot. 2 . 5 . 4 P C I / P C I - X s l o t s The PCI and PCI-X slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI/PCI-X speciï¬Âcations. 3 2 - b i t P C I s l o t 6 4 - b i t P C I - X s l o t When installing an optional ZCR card, install the card on PCI_X2 slot that is colored green. A PCI Express graphics card may run only at x1 speed due to chipset limitation. PCI Express I/O cards may only run at x8 or x4 speed. 2 . 5 . 6 M i n i - P C I s o c k e t The mini-PCI socket on the motherboard supports an ASUS Server Management Board. M i n i - P C I s o c k e t
2 - 1 8 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2.6 Jumpers 1 . C l e a r R T C R A M ( C L R T C 1 ) This jumper allows you to clear the Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. You can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. To erase the RTC RAM: 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery. 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Re-install the battery. 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer. 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! P5MT-S Clear RTC RAM CLRTC1 Normal (Default) Clear CMOS 1 2 2 3 P5MT-S î
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 1 9 2 . C P U f a n p i n s e l e c t i o n ( 3 - p i n F M _ C P U 1 , F M _ C P U 2 ) These jumpers allow you to connect either a 3-pin or a 4-pin fan cable plug to the CPU fan connectors (CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2). Set these jumpers to pins 1-2 if you are using a 3-pin fan cable plug, or to pins 2-3 if you are using a 4-pin plug. 3 . U S B d e v i c e w a k e - u p ( 3 - p i n U S B P W 1 2 , U S B P W 3 4 ) Set these jumpers to 5V to wake up the computer from S1 sleep mode (CPU stopped, DRAM refreshed, system running in low power mode) using the connected USB devices. Set to 5VSB to wake up from S4 sleep mode (no power to CPU, DRAM in slow refresh, power supply in reduced power mode). ⢠The USB device wake-up feature requires a power supply that can provide 500mA on the 5VSB lead for each USB port; otherwise, the system would not power up. ⢠If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 4 to wake up the system from S4 sleep mode. ⢠The total current consumed must NOT exceed the power supply capability ( 5VSB) whether under normal condition or in sleep mode. P5MT-S USB Device Wake-U p USBPW12 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 3 1 2 USBPW34 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 1 3 2 P5MT-S î P5MT-S î P5MT-S FM CPU Setting FM_CPU2 FM_CPU1 1 2 2 3 3-pin fan 4-pin fan (Default) 2 3 2 1 3-pin fan 4-pin fan (Default)
2 - 2 0 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 4 . K e y b o a r d / M o u s e p o w e r ( 3 - p i n K B P W R 1 ) Thi s j ump er all ows yo u t o e nab le or dis abl e t he key boa rd/mouse wak e-u p f eat ure . S et thi s j ump er to pin s 2 -3 ( 5VSB ) to w ake up the co mpu ter wh en you pr ess a key on th e k eyb oar d ( the de fau lt is the Sp ace Ba r) or use the mouse. This f eature requi res an ATX pow er sup ply th at can su ppl y a t l eas t 1 A o n t he 5V SB lea d, and a cor res pon din g s ett ing in th e B IOS . 5 . V G A c o n t r o l l e r s e t t i n g ( 3 - p i n V G A _ E N 1 ) These jumpers allow you to enable or disable the onboard ATI î RAGE-XL PCI VGA controller. Set to pins 1-2 to activate the VGA feature. P5MT-S î P5MT-S Keyboard Power Setting KBPWR1 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 3 1 2 P5MT-S î P5MT-S VGA Setting VGA_EN1 Enable (Default) Disable 2 1 2 3
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 2 1 6 . G i g a b i t L A N c o n t r o l l e r s e t t i n g ( 3 - p i n L A N _ E N 1 , L A N _ E N 2 ) These jumpers allow you to enable or disable the onboard Broadcom î BCM5721 Gigabit LAN1 or LAN2 controller. Set to pins 1-2 to activate the Gigabit LAN controller. 7 . R A I D c o n t r o l l e r s e l e c t i o n ( 3 - p i n R A I D _ S E L 1 ) T h i s j u m p e r a l l o w s y o u t o s e l e c t t h e RA ID c on ï¬Âg ur at io n ut il it y to u se w he n y o u c r e a t e d i s k a r r a y s . P l a c e t h e j u m pe r ca ps o ve r pi ns 1 -2 i f yo u wa nt t o u s e t h e LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility (default); otherwise, place the jumper caps to pins 2-3 to use the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager. P5MT-S î P5MT-S LAN1 Controller Setting Enable (Default) Disable LAN_EN1 2 1 2 3 P5MT-S LAN2 Controller Setting Enable (Default) Disable LAN_EN2 2 1 2 3 P5MT-S î P5MT-S î RAID_SEL1 LSI RAID ROM (Default) INTEL RAID ROM 2 1 2 3 P5MT-S RAID Controller Selection
2 - 2 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 9 . F o r c e B I O S r e c o v e r y s e t t i n g ( 3 - p i n R E C O V E R Y 1 ) This jumper allows you to quickly update or recover the BIOS when it gets corrupted. To update the BIOS: 1. Prepare a ï¬Âoppy disk that contains the latest BIOS for the motherboard (xxxx-xxx.ROM) and the AFUDOS.EXE utility. 2. Set the jumper to pins 2-3. 3. Insert the ï¬Âoppy disk then turn on the system to update the BIOS. 4. Shut down the system. 5. Set the jumper back to pins 1-2. 6. Turn on the system. 2 3 1 2 P5MT-S SCSI Controller Setting SCSI_EN1 Enable (Default) Disable P5MT-S î P5MT-S î P5MT-S BIOS Recovery Setting RECOVERY1 (Default) Normal BIOS recovery 2 3 2 1 8 . S C S I c o n t r o l l e r s e t t i n g ( 3 - p i n S C S I _ E N 1 ) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard Adaptec AIC-7901X PCI-X U320 SCSI controller. Set to pins 1-2 to activate the SCSI feature, and support RAID conï¬Âgurations.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 2 3 2.7 Connectors 2 . 7 . 1 R e a r p a n e l c o n n e c t o r s A C T / L I N K L E D S P E E D L E D S t a t u s D e s c r i p t i o n S t a t u s D e s c r i p t i o n OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection GREEN Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection L A N p o r t L E D i n d i c a t i o n s L A N p o r t S P E E D L E D A C T / L I N K L E D 1 3 6 5 7 8 4 2 1. PS/2 mouse port (green). This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 2. Parallel port. This 25-pin port connects a parallel printer, a scanner, or other devices. 3. PS/2 keyboard port (purple). This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. 4. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 5. Serial (COM1) port. This 9-pin communication port is for pointing devices or other serial devices. 6. VGA port. This port is for a VGA monitor or other VGA-compatible devices. 7. Gigabit LAN1 (RJ-45) port. This ports allow Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 8. Gigabit LAN2 (RJ-45) port. This ports allow Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications.
2 - 2 4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . I C H 7 R P r i m a r y I D E c o n n e c t o r ( 4 0 - 1 p i n P R I _ I D E 1 ) Thi s c onn ect or is for an Ul tra DM A 1 00/66 signal cable . The Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable has three connectors: a blue connector for the primary IDE connector on the motherboard, a black connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE slave device (optical drive/hard disk drive), and a gray connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE master device (hard disk drive). If you install two hard disk drives, you must conï¬Âgure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly. Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector. This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE devices. 2 . 7 . 2 I n t e r n a l c o n n e c t o r s 1 . F l o p p y d i s k d r i v e c o n n e c t o r ( 3 4 - 1 p i n F L O P P Y 1 ) This connector is for the provided Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector, then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. P5MT-S Floppy Disk Drive Connector FLOPPY1 PIN 1 P5MT-S î P5MT-S IDE Connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE1 PI N 1 P5MT-S î
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 2 5 3 . S e r i a l A T A c o n n e c t o r s ( 7 - p i n S A T A 1 , S A T A 2 , S A T A 3 , S A T A 4 ) These connectors are for the Serial ATA signal cables for Serial ATA hard disk drives. If you installed Serial ATA hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and RAID 5 conï¬Âguration using the Intel î Matrix Storage Technology or RAID 0, RAID 1 and RAID 0 1 conï¬Âguration using the LSI MegaRAID î utility embedded in the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge. S e r i a l A T A h a r d d i s k d r i v e c o n n e c t i o n C o n n e c t o r S e t t i n g U s e SATA1/SATA2 Master Boot disk SATA3/SATA4 Slave Data disk Thes e conn ecto rs are set IDE mode by d efault . In IDE mo de, you can conn ect Se rial ATA b oot/ data ha rd dis k dr ives t o th ese con nector s. I f you intend to create a S erial A TA RAI D se t usin g th ese co nnec tors, s et the Conï¬Âgure SATA as item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section âÂÂ4.3.4 IDE Conï¬Âgurationâ for details. Important notes on Serial ATA ⢠Use only two Serial ATA RAID connectors for each RAID 0 or RAID 1 set. ⢠Wh en us ing the co nnec tor s i n ID E m od e, co nne ct the pr ima ry (b oo t) ha rd di sk dr ive to the SAT A1 or SA TA2 c onn ec tor . Ref er to t he t abl e be low f or th e re com men ded SATA hard disk drive connections. P5MT-S SA T A Connectors SA T A2 GN D RS A TA _TXP 2 RS A TA _TXN 2 GN D RS A TA _RXP 2 RS A TA _RXN 2 GN D SA T A1 GN D RS A TA _TXP 1 RS A TA _TXN 1 GN D RS A TA _RXP 1 RS A TA _RXN 1 GN D SA T A4 GN D RS A TA _TXP 4 RS A TA _TXN 4 GN D RS A TA _RXP 4 RS A TA _RXN 4 GN D SA T A3 GN D RS A TA _TXP 3 RS A TA _TXN 3 GN D RS A TA _RXP 3 RS A TA _RXN 3 GN D P5MT-S î
2 - 2 6 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 4 . H a r d d i s k a c t i v i t y L E D c o n n e c t o r ( 4 - p i n H D L E D 1 ) This connector supplies power to the hard disk activity LED. The read or write activities of any device connected to the SCSI connectors or the SATA connectors cause this LED to light up. 5 . U S B c o n n e c t o r ( 1 0 - 1 p i n U S B 3 4 ) This connector is for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. This USB connector complies with USB 2.0 speciï¬Âcation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. The USB port module is purchased separately. P5MT-S î P5MT-S SCSI/SA T A Card Activity LED Connector HDLED1 1 ADD_IN_CARD_ACT# NC ADD_IN_CARD_ACT# NC P5MT-S î USB 5V USB_P3- USB_P3 GND NC P5MT-S USB 2.0 Connector USB34 USB 5V USB_P2- USB_P2 GND
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 2 7 6 . U l t r a 3 2 0 S C S I c o n n e c t o r ( 6 8 - p i n S C S I A 1 ) This motherboard comes with the Adaptec AIC-7901X PCI-X U320 SCSI controller that supports one 68-Pin Ultra320 SCSI connector. The SCSI channel can support a maximum of 15 SCSI devices as speciï¬Âed by Ultra320 standards. SCSI Connection Notes This motherboard has a 68-Pin Ultra320 SCSI connector. The onboard SCSI chipset incorporates an advanced multimode I/O cell that supports both single-ended (SE), Ultra2, Ultra160, and Ultra320 devices. With Ultra320 devices, the SCSI bus platform performs at full Ultra320 speeds (up to 320MB/s) and extended cabling 12m (or 25m in a point-to-point conï¬Âguration). When an SE device is attached, the bus defaults to an SE speed and 1.5m cable length. Connect SCSI devices as speciï¬Âed. A SCSI channel should have only one type of SCSI standard (e.g. Ultra320, Ultra160, Ultra2, Ultra-Wide). Mixing SCSI devices on a single channel decreases performance of the slower devices. P5MT-S Onboard SCSI Connector 35 68 34 1 SCSIA1 68-Pin Ultra320/ Ultra2-Wide SCSI Connector P5MT-S î
2 - 2 8 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 7 . S e r i a l p o r t c o n n e c t o r ( 1 0 - 1 p i n C O M 2 ) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The serial port module is purchased separately. 8 . B M C c o n n e c t o r ( 1 6 - p i n B M C C O N N 1 ) This connector is for the ASUS server management card, if available. 9 . A m b i e n t t h e r m a l s e n s o r ( 2 - p i n T R P W R 1 ) If you want additional thermal monitoring, connect the thermal sensor cable with thermistor (of 1úK or at 25úC, B=3435) to this connector. P5MT-S î P5MT-S BMC Connector BMCCONN1 5VSB 5VSB BMC SMBCLK 12CCLK1 PSON# BMC_RST# PWROK PSONEN# 5VSB 5VSB BMC SMBDA TA 12CDA TA1 FP_PWRBTN# BMC_PRESENT# BMC_SMI# GND P5MT-S î P5MT-S TRPWR Connector TRPWR1 SYS-THEAMAL2 GND P5MT-S î P5MT-S Serial Port2 (COM2) Connector PIN 1 COM2
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 2 9 1 0 . C P U a n d s y s t e m f a n c o n n e c t o r s ( 3 - p i n C P U _ F A N 1 / 2 , R E A R _ F A N 1 / 2 , F R N T _ F A N 1 / 2 ) The fa n c onn ect ors su ppo rt coo lin g f ans of 35 0 mA ~ 740 mA (8.88 W max.) or a total of 2.1 A ~ 4.44 A (53.28 W max.) at 12V. Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector. Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufï¬Âcient air ï¬Âow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! 1 1 . B a c k p l a n e S M B u s c o n n e c t o r ( 6 - 1 p i n B P S M B 1 ) This connector allows you to connect SMBus (System Management Bus) devices. Devices communicate with an SMBus host and/or other SMBus devices using the SMBus interface. P5MT-S î P5MT-S Fan Connectors REAR_F AN2 REAR_F AN1 FRNT_F AN1 FRNT_F AN2 GND F ANPWR PWM CPU_F AN2 CPU_F AN1 GND F ANPWR PWM GND Rotation FANPWR CPU_FAN2 REAR_FAN2 REAR_FAN1 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 CPU_FAN1 GND Rotation FANPWR GND Rotation GND Rotation FANPWR Rotation Rotation FANPWR P5MT-S î P5MT-S SMBus Connector BPSMB1 1 I2C_CLK GND I2C_DA T A 5V F ANOUT
2 - 3 0 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 1 2 . P o w e r s u p p l y S M B u s c o n n e c t o r ( 5 - p i n P S U S M B 1 ) This connector is for the power supply SMB cable, if your power supply supports the SMBus function. 1 3 . S S I p o w e r c o n n e c t o r s ( 2 4 - p i n A T X P W R 1 , 8 - p i n A T X 1 2 V 2 ) T he s e c on n ec t or s a r e f or SS I p ow e r s up p ly pl u gs . T h e p ow e r s up p ly pl u gs a re de s ig n ed to ï¬Ât th es e c o nn e ct o rs in on l y o ne or i en t at i on . F i nd th e p r op e r o ri e nt a ti o n a nd pu s h do w n ﬠrm l y u nt i l t he co n ne c to r s c om p le t el y ﬠt . ⢠Use of an SSI 12 V Speciï¬Âcation 2.0-compliant power supply unit (PSU) that provides a minimum power of 450 W is recommended for a fully-conï¬Âgured system. ⢠By default, four ATX12V2 connector pins are covered to prevent incorrent insertion of a 4-pin ATX 12V power plug. Remove this cover when using a PSU with an 8-pin ATX 12V power plug. ⢠Do not forget to connect the 4-pin or 8-pin ATX 12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠We recommend that you use a P SU wi th a hig he r p ow er ou tput wh en co nï¬Âg ur ing a sys tem wi th m ore po we r c on sum in g de vic es. T he sy ste m ma y b ec ome u nsta ble or may no t b oo t u p if th e po wer is ina deq uat e. ⢠You must install a PSU with a higher power rating if you intend to install additional devices. P5MT-S î P5MT-S Power Supply SMBus Connector PSUSMB1 3.3V Remote Sense GND NC PSU_I2CDA TA PSU_I2CCLK P5MT-S A TX Power Connectors 24-pin Power Connector A TX12V2 A TXPWR1 3 Volts 3 Volts Ground 5 Volts 5 Volts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 Volts -5 Volts 5 Volts 3 Volts -12 Volts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 Volts 12 Volts 3 Volts 5 Volts 1 Ground GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC P5MT-S î
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 3 1 1 4 . A u x i l i a r y p a n e l c o n n e c t o r ( 2 0 - p i n A U X _ P A N E L 1 ) This connector is for additional front panel features including front panel SMB, locator LED and switch, chassis intrusion, and LAN LEDs. ⢠Front panel SMB (6-1 pin FPSMB) These leads connect the front panel SMBus cable. ⢠LAN activity LED (2-pin LAN1_LED, LAN2_LED) These leads are for Gigabit LAN activity LEDs on the front panel. ⢠Chassis intrusion (2-pin CHASSIS) These leads are for the intrusion detection feature for chassis with intrusion sensor or microswitch. When you remove any chassis component, the sensor triggers and sends a high-level signal to these leads to record a chassis intrusion event. ⢠Locator LED (6-pin LOCATOR) The se lea ds are fo r t he loc ato r s wit ch and LE D o n t he fro nt pan el. P5MT-S î P5MT-S Auxiliary Panel Connector AUX_P ANEL1 I2C_4_DA TA# LOCA TORLED1 5VSB LOCA TORLED1- LAN1_LINKACTLED- LOCA TORBTN# LAN1_LINKACTLED GND 5VSB I2C_4_CLK# GND GND LAN2_LINKACTLED LOCA TORLED2- LAN2_LINKACTLED- LOCA TORLED2 CASEOPEN PIN1 NC
2 - 3 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 1 5 . S y s t e m p a n e l c o n n e c t o r ( 2 0 - p i n P A N E L 1 ) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector. The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power, and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Message LED (Brown 2-pin MLED) This connector is for the message LED cable that connects to the front message LED. The message LED indicates the booting status. The LED blinks when the system is in the boot process until the operating system is loaded. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector. The IDE LED lights up or ï¬Âashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker. The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠ATX power button/soft-off button (Light Green 2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF. ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power. The system panel connector is color-coded for easy connection. P5MT-S System Panel Connector P ANEL1 MLED- GND NC POWERBTN# 5V GND GND NC POWERLED HDLED GND HDLED- POWERLED- MLED NMIBTN# GND RESETBTN# SPKROUT GND P5MT-S î
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system.
A S U S P 5 M T - S Chapter summary 3 3.1 Starting up for the ï¬Ârst time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer ................................................... 3-2
A S U S P 5 M T - S 3 - 1 3.1 Starting up for the ï¬Ârst time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover. 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector. 5. Turn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power, the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems with ATX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the ATX power button. If your monitor complies with âÂÂgreenâ standards or if it has a âÂÂpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the Power-On Self-Test (POST). While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power, the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. 7. At power on, hold down the <Del> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4. A M I B I O S b e e p c o d e s B e e p D e s c r i p t i o n E r r o r One beep Keyboard controller error Refresh Time error No master drive detected Two continuous beeps followed by Floppy controller failure two short beeps Two continuous beeps followed by Hardware component failure four short beeps
3 - 2 C h a p t e r 3 : P o w e r i n g u p 3.2 Powering off the computer 3 . 2 . 1 U s i n g t h e O S s h u t d o w n f u n c t i o n If you are using Windows î Server 2000: 1. Click the Start button then click Shut Down... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. If you are using Windows î Server 2003: 1. Click the Start button then select Turn Off Computer. 2. Click the Turn Off button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down 3 . 2 . 2 U s i n g t h e d u a l f u n c t i o n p o w e r s w i t c h While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section âÂÂ4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4 for details
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
Chapter summary 4 A S U S P 5 M T - S 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program ............................................................ 4-10 4.3 Main menu ........................................................................... 4-13 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-18 4.5 Power Conï¬Âguration ........................................................... 4-27 4.6 Server menu ....................................................................... 4-32 4.7 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-34 4.8 Exit menu ............................................................................ 4-39
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk.) 2. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS ï¬Âle fails or gets corrupted.) 3. ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. 4 . 1 . 1 C r e a t i n g a b o o t a b l e f l o p p y d i s k To create a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk: DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB ï¬Âoppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS ï¬Âle to a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities.
4 - 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 1 . 2 A F U D O S u t i l i t y The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS ï¬Âle in DOS environment using a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk with the updated BIOS ï¬Âle. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS ï¬Âle that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. C o p y i n g t h e c u r r e n t B I O S To copy the current BIOS ï¬Âle using the AFUDOS utility: The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS ï¬Âle. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS ï¬Âle to the ï¬Âoppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AM I F irm war e U pda te Uti lit y - Ve rsi on 1.1 9(A SUS V2 .07 (03 .11 .24 BB) ) Cop yrig ht (C ) 20 02 Am eric an M ega tren ds , I nc. All r ight s res erve d. Reading ï¬Âash ..... done Write to ï¬Âle...... ok A:\> 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable ï¬Âoppy disk you created earlier. 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[ï¬Âlename] where the [ï¬Âlename] is any user-assigned ï¬Âlename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main ï¬Âlename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. ⢠Make sure that the ï¬Âoppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1024 KB free space to save the ï¬Âle. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only. The actual BIOS screen displays may not be same as shown. M a i n f i l e n a m e E x t e n s i o n n a m e A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 3 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable ï¬Âoppy disk you created earlier. 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[ï¬Âlename] where [ï¬Âlename] is the latest or the original BIOS ï¬Âle on the bootable ï¬Âoppy disk. U p d a t i n g t h e B I O S f i l e To update the BIOS ï¬Âle using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) and download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle for the motherboard. Save the BIOS ï¬Âle to a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5MTS.rom Write the BIOS ï¬Âlename on a piece of paper. You need to type the exact BIOS ï¬Âlename at the DOS prompt. A:\>afudos /iP5MTS.ROM AM I F irm war e U pda te Uti lit y - Ve rsi on 1.1 9(A SUS V2 .07 (03 .11 .24 BB) ) Cop yrig ht (C ) 20 02 Am eric an M ega tren ds , I nc. All r ight s res erve d. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during ï¬Âash BIOS Reading ï¬Âle ....... done Reading ï¬Âash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing ï¬Âash ...... done Writing ï¬Âash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility veriï¬Âes the ï¬Âle and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure!
4 - 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5MTS.ROM AM I F irm war e U pda te Uti lit y - Ve rsi on 1.1 9(A SUS V2 .07 (03 .11 .24 BB) ) Cop yrig ht (C ) 20 02 Am eric an M ega tren ds , I nc. All r ight s res erve d. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during ï¬Âash BIOS Reading ï¬Âle ....... done Reading ï¬Âash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing ï¬Âash ...... done Writing ï¬Âash ...... done Verifying ï¬Âash .... done Please restart your computer A:\> U p d a t i n g t h e B I O S f i l e u s i n g a U S B f l a s h d r i v e If you have not purchased a USB ï¬Âoppy disk drive, you may update the BIOS ï¬Âle using a USB ï¬Âash drive. Format the USB ï¬Âash drive to FAT16 or 32 system ï¬Âle before updating the BIOS. To format the USB ï¬Âash drive to a FAT32/16 system ï¬Âle: 1. Insert the USB ï¬Âash drive to an available USB port. 2. From the Windows desktop, click Start, then select My computer. 3. Right-click the USB ï¬Âash drive icon, then select Format from the menu. 4. From the File system ï¬Âeld, select FAT32 or FAT16, then click the Start button. To update the BIOS ï¬Âle: 1. Copy the original or the latest BIOS ï¬Âle and the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) to the USB ï¬Âash drive. 2. Insert the USB ï¬Âash drive to an available USB port, then place the motherboard support CD to the optical drive. 3. Boot the system from the support CD, then select the FreeDOS command prompt. 4. At the DOS prompt, replace the prompt with the USB ï¬Âash disk drive letter, then type: afudos /i[ï¬Âlename] 5. Follow the instructions in the previous section to update the BIOS ï¬Âle.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 5 4 . 1 . 3 A S U S C r a s h F r e e B I O S 2 u t i l i t y The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS ï¬Âle when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. You can update a corrupted BIOS ï¬Âle using the motherboard support CD or the ï¬Âoppy disk that contains the updated BIOS ï¬Âle. R e c o v e r i n g t h e B I O S f r o m a f l o p p y d i s k To recover the BIOS from a ï¬Âoppy disk: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Insert the ï¬Âoppy disk with the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the ï¬Âoppy disk for the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... Floppy found! Reading ï¬Âle âÂÂP5MTS.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start ï¬Âashing... When found, the utility reads the BIOS ï¬Âle and starts ï¬Âashing the corrupted BIOS ï¬Âle. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! ⢠Prepare the motherboard support CD or the ï¬Âoppy disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility. ⢠Make sure that you rename the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle in the ï¬Âoppy disk to P5MTS.ROM.
4 - 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p R e c o v e r i n g t h e B I O S f r o m t h e s u p p o r t C D To recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Remove any ï¬Âoppy disk from the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then turn on the system. 2. Insert the support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the ï¬Âoppy disk for the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... Floppy not found! Checking for CD-ROM... CD-ROM found! Reading ï¬Âle âÂÂP5MTS.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start ï¬Âashing... When no ï¬Âoppy disk is found, the utility automatically checks the optical drive for the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle. The utility then updates the corrupted BIOS ï¬Âle. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure!
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 7 I n s t a l l i n g A S U S U p d a t e To install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 4 . 1 . 4 A S U S U p d a t e u t i l i t y The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS file ⢠Download the latest BIOS file from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS file ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. Quit all Microsoft î Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP).
4 - 8 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network trafï¬Âc, or click Auto Select. Click Next. U p d a t i n g t h e B I O S t h r o u g h t h e I n t e r n e t To update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate. The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 9 U p d a t i n g t h e B I O S t h r o u g h a B I O S f i l e To update the BIOS through a BIOS ï¬Âle: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate. The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a ï¬Âle option from the drop-down menu, then click Next. 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS ï¬Âle from the Open window, then click Save. 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
4 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable ï¬Ârmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section âÂÂ4.1 Managing and updating your BIOSâÂÂ. Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconï¬Âguring your system, or prompted to âÂÂRun SetupâÂÂ. This section explains how to conï¬Âgure your system using this utility. Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the conï¬Âguration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconï¬Âgure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the ï¬Ârmware hub. The ï¬Ârmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility. When you start up the computer, the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Delete> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST, restart the system by pressing <Ctrl> <Alt> <Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. You can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the ï¬Ârst two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability. Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit Menu. See section âÂÂ4.8 Exit Menu.â â¢ The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only, and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle for this motherboard.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 1 1 4 . 2 . 2 M e n u b a r The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conï¬Âguration Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the Advanced Power Management (APM) conï¬Âguration Server For changing the advanced server settings Boot For changing the system boot conï¬Âguration Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings To select an item on the menu bar, press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4 . 2 . 3 N a v i g a t i o n k e y s At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. 4 . 2 . 1 B I O S m e n u s c r e e n Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another. N a v i g a t i o n k e y s S u b - m e n u i t e m s System Overview System Date [Mon 05/30/2005] System Time [11:10:19] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] IDE Conï¬Âguration System Information G e n e r a l h e l p M e n u b a r C o n f i g u r a t i o n f i e l d s M e n u i t e m s Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. Use [ENTER]. [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit
4 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 2 . 4 M e n u i t e m s The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciï¬Âc items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power, Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4 . 2 . 5 S u b - m e n u i t e m s A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. To display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4 . 2 . 6 C o n f i g u r a t i o n f i e l d s These ï¬Âelds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user-conï¬Âgurable, you can change the value of the ï¬Âeld opposite the item. You cannot select an item that is not user-conï¬Âgurable. A conï¬Âgurable ï¬Âeld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. To change the value of a ï¬Âeld, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to âÂÂ4.2.7 Pop-up window.â 4 . 2 . 7 P o p - u p w i n d o w Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conï¬Âguration options for that item. 4 . 2 . 8 S c r o l l b a r A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not ï¬Ât on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> /<Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4 . 2 . 9 G e n e r a l h e l p At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. M a i n m e n u i t e m s Sy st em Da te [Mon 05/30/2005] System Time [11:10:19] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] IDE Conï¬Âguration System Information BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit APM Conï¬Âguration Power Management/APM [Enabled] Video Power Down Mode [Suspend] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend] Suspend Time Out(Minute) [Disabled] Throttle Slow Clock Ratio [50%] Power Button Function [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On by PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On by PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On Ring [Disabled] Power On PME# [Disabled] Power On RTC Alarm [Disabled] Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced S c r o l l b a r P o p - u p w i n d o w
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 1 3 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4 . 3 . 1 S y s t e m T i m e [ x x : x x : x x ] Allows you to set the system time. 4 . 3 . 2 S y s t e m D a t e [ D a y x x / x x / x x x x ] Allows you to set the system date. 4 . 3 . 3 L e g a c y D i s k e t t e A [ 1 . 4 4 M , 3 . 5 i n . ] Sets the type of ï¬Âoppy drive installed. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] Refer to section âÂÂ4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Mon 05/27/2005] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] IDE Conï¬Âguration System Information Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Use [ENTER]. [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit
4 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p A T A / I D E C o n f i g u r a t i o n [ E n h a n c e d ] Allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the installed operating system (OS). Set to [Enhanced] if you are using native OS, e.g. Windows î 2000/XP. Set to [Compatible] if you are using legacy OS, e.g. Windows ME/98/NT, MS-DOS. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Compatible] [Enhanced] The items Conï¬Âgure SATA as and Third, Fourth IDE Master/Slave options appear only when you set the ATA/IDE Conï¬Âguration to [Enhanced]. 4 . 3 . 4 I D E C o n f i g u r a t i o n The items in this menu allow you to set or change the conï¬Âgurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you wish to conï¬Âgure the item. IDE Conï¬Âguration ATA/IDE Conï¬Âguration [Enhanced] Conï¬Âgure SATA as [IDE] Primary IDE Master : [Not Detected] Primary IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Third IDE Master : [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave : [Not Detected] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] Set [Compatible Mode] when Legacy OS (i.e. WIN ME, 98, NT4.0, MS DOS)is used. Set [Enhanced Mode] when Native OS (i.e. WIN2000, WIN XP) is used. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. Configure SATA As [IDE] Sets the conï¬Âguration for the Serial ATA connectors supported by the Southbridge chip. If you want to use the Serial ATA hard disk drives as Parallel ATA physical storage devices, set this item to [IDE]. Set this item to [RAID], if you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, or RAID 5 conï¬Âgurations using the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager or if you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 conï¬Âgurations using the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility. Set the item Conï¬Âgure SATA as to [RAID] if you want to use or conï¬Âgure the SATA connectors under SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9.0 SP1 operating system environment. Due to the OS limitation, you must set a SATA RAID to use any SATA device (at least two SATA devices are needed for the RAID conï¬Âguration). Refer to Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 for details on how to set a SATA RAID.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 1 5 The AHCI allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial ATA features that enhance storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. 4 . 3 . 5 P r i m a r y , T h i r d , F o u r t h I D E M a s t e r / S l a v e The BIOS automatically detects the connected IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item, then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. Primary IDE Master Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST32122A Size : 2.1GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : Supported Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled] Select the type of device connected to the system. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, Vendor, Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-conï¬Âgurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. If you want the Serial ATA hard disk drives to use the Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI), set this item to [AHCI]. For details on AHCI, go to: www.intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012304.htm www.intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012305.htm The SATA controller is set to Native mode when this item is set to [RAID] or [AHCI]. Legacy IDE Channels [SATA Pri, PATA Sec] Allows you to set Serial ATA, Parallel ATA, or both, to native mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [SATA Only] [PATA Pri, SATA Sec] [SATA Pri, PATA Sec] [PATA Only] I D E D e t e c t T i m e O u t ( S e c ) [ 3 5 ] Selects the time our value (in seconds) for detecting ATA/ATAPI devices. Conï¬Âguration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] The item Legacy IDE Channels appears only when you set the ATA/IDE Conï¬Âguration to [Compatible].
4 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p T y p e [ A u t o ] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are speciï¬Âcally conï¬Âguring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (ATAPI Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP, LS-120, or MO drive. Conï¬Âguration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] L B A / L a r g e M o d e [ A u t o ] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] B l o c k ( M u l t i - s e c t o r T r a n s f e r ) [ A u t o ] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] P I O M o d e [ A u t o ] Selects the PIO mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] D M A M o d e [ A u t o ] Selects the DMA mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] S M A R T M o n i t o r i n g [ A u t o ] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 3 2 B i t D a t a T r a n s f e r [ E n a b l e d ] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 1 7 4 . 3 . 6 S y s t e m I n f o r m a t i o n This menu gives you an overview of the general system speciï¬Âcations. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. A M I B I O S Displays the auto-detected BIOS information. P r o c e s s o r Displays the auto-detected CPU speciï¬Âcation. S y s t e m M e m o r y Displays the auto-detected total system memory. AMIBIOS Version : 08.00.11 Build Date : 12/01/05 Processor Type : Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Speed : 3200 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Total : 1024MB Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main
4 - 1 8 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. Take caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect ï¬Âeld values can cause the system to malfunction. MPS Conï¬Âguration CPU Conï¬Âguration Chipset Onboard Devices Conï¬Âguration PCIPnP Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Conï¬Âgure the Multi- Processor Table. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Select MPS Revision. MPS Conï¬Âguration MPS Revision [1.4] 4 . 4 . 1 M P S C o n f i g u r a t i o n M P S R e v i s i o n [ 1 . 4 ] Allows you to select the multi-processor system version. Conï¬Âguration options: [1.1] [1.4]
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 1 9 4 . 4 . 2 C P U C o n f i g u r a t i o n The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. NOTE: If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conï¬Âgure Advanced CPU settings Module Version: 3C.0B Manufacturer: Intel Brand String: Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Frequency : 3.40 GHz FSB Speed : 800 MHz Cache L1 : 16 KB Cache L2 : 1024 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked (Max:17, Min:14) Ratio Actual Value: 17 Ratio CMOS Setting [ 16] Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Hyper Threading Technology [Enabled] You can only adjust the Ratio CMOS Setting if you installed an unlocked CPU. Refer to the CPU documentation for details. R a t i o C M O S S e t t i n g [ 1 6 ] Sets the ratio between the CPU Core Clock and the Front Side Bus frequency. The default value of this item is auto-detected by the BIOS. Use the < > or <-> keys to adjust the values. Conï¬Âguration options: [8]...[28] M a x C P U I D V a l u e L i m i t [ D i s a b l e d ] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] H y p e r - T h r e a d i n g T e c h n o l o g y [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper-Threading Technology. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Hyper-Threading Technology item appears only when you installed an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Hyper-Threading Technology. Hyper-Threading is not supported when you installed a dual-core CPU.
4 - 2 0 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p C 1 E S u p p o r t [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], BIOS automatically checks the CPU capability to enable C1E support. In C1E mode, the CPU has lower power consumption when idle. Conï¬Âguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] S i n g l e L o g i c a l P r o c e s s o r M o d e [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the single logical processor mode for dual- core CPUs. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] I n t e l ( R ) S p e e d S t e p T e c h n o l o g y [ A u t o m a t i c ] Allows you to use the Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology. When set to [Automatic], you can adjust the system power settings in the operating system to use the EIST feature. Se t t his it em to [Di sab led ] if you do not want to use the EIST. Conï¬Âguration options: [Automatic] [Disabled] The following items appear only when you installed an Intel î Pentium î 4 dual-core CPU. ⢠Refer to the Appendix for details on how to use the EIST feature. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS ï¬Âle that supports EIST.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 2 1 O n b o a r d L A N B o o t R O M [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard LAN controller. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] O n b o a r d S C S I B o o t R O M [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard SCSI controller. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4 . 4 . 3 C h i p s e t C o n f i g u r a t i o n The Chipset Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conï¬Âgure North Bridge feature Advanced Chipset Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. North Bridge Conï¬Âguration South Bridge Conï¬Âguration Intel PCI-X Hub Conï¬Âguration Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Enabled] Onboard SCSI Boot ROM [Enabled]
4 - 2 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p N o r t h B r i d g e C o n f i g u r a t i o n The NorthBridge Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the Northbridge related settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced ENABLE: Allow remapping of overlapped PCI memory above the total physical memory. DISABLE: Do not allow remapping of memory. North Bridge Chipset Conï¬Âguration Memory Remap Feature [Enabled] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Conï¬Âgure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Boots Graphics Adapter Priority[PEG/PCI] PEG Port Conï¬Âguration PEG Port [Auto] M e m o r y R e m a p F e a t u r e [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to remap the overlap PCI memory over the total physical memory. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] D R A M F r e q u e n c y [ A u t o ] Allows you to set the DDR operating frequency. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [533 MHz] [667 MHz] C o n f i g u r e D R A M T i m i n g b y S P D [ E n a b l e d ] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. The following sub-items appear when this item is disabled. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM CAS# Latency [5] Controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Conï¬Âguration options: [5] [4] [3] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [6 DRAM Clocks] Controls the latency between the DDR SDRAM active command and the read/write command. Conï¬Âguration options: [2 DRAM Clocks] [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks] [5 DRAM Clocks] [6 DRAM Clocks] Disable this item if you are using RedHat Linux Advanced Server 3.0 UP5/UP6 operating system.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 2 3 S o u t h B r i d g e C o n f i g u r a t i o n The SouthBridge Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the Southbridge related settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced To select number of UHCI USB Ports (USB 1.1) to be enabled. South Bridge Chipset Conï¬Âguration USB Functions [4 USB Ports] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] PCIE Ports Conï¬Âguration PCI Express Port 0 [Auto] PCI Express Port 4 [Auto] PCI Express Port 5 [Auto] U S B F u n c t i o n [ 4 U S B P o r t s ] Allows you to enable a speciï¬Âc number of USB ports, or disable the USB function. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [2 USB Ports] [4 USB Ports] U S B 2 . 0 C o n t r o l l e r [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller. Conï¬Âguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] DRAM RAS# Precharge [6 DRAM Clocks] Controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DDR SDRAM. Conï¬Âguration options: [2 DRAM Clocks] [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks] [5 DRAM Clocks] [6 DRAM Clocks] DRAM RAS# Activate to Precharge Delay [15 DRAM Clocks] Conï¬Âguration options: [4 DRAM Clocks] [5 DRAM Clocks] ~ [15 DRAM Clocks] B o o t G r a p h i c A d a p t e r P r i o r i t y [ P E G / P C I ] Allows selection of the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. Conï¬Âguration options: [PEG/PCI] [PCI/PEG] P E G P o r t C o n f i g u r a t i o n PEG Port [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Graphic port. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled]
4 - 2 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p P C I E P o r t C o n f i g u r a t i o n PCI Express Port 0 [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Port 0. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] PCI Express Port 4 [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Port 4. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] PCI Express Port 5 [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Port 5. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] I n t e l P C I - X H u b C o n f i g u r a t i o n The Intel PCI-X Hub Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the Intel PCI Express controller related settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Select the decode range for IO. Conï¬Âgure advanced settings for PCI-X Hub I/O Port Decode [4K Decode] VGA 16-Bit Decode [Enabled] I / O P o r t D e c o d e [ 4 K D e c o d e ] Allows you to set the decode range for the I/O controller. Conï¬Âguration options: [4K Decode] [1K Decode] V G A 1 6 - B i t D e c o d e [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the decode for the VGA controller. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 2 5 4 . 4 . 4 O n b o a r d D e v i c e s C o n f i g u r a t i o n Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Allows BIOS to Enable or Disable Floppy Controller. Conï¬Âgure W83627EHG-A Super IO Chipset Onboard Floppy Controller [Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3FB/IRQ4] Serial Port2 Address [2FB/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Mode [Normal] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Mode [Normal] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] O n b o a r d F l o p p y C o n t r o l l e r [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable the onboard ï¬Âoppy disk drive controller. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] S e r i a l P o r t 1 A d d r e s s [ 3 F 8 / I R Q 4 ] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] S e r i a l P o r t 2 A d d r e s s [ 2 F 8 / I R Q 3 ] Allows you to select the Serial Port2 base address. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Mode [Normal] Allows you to select the Serial Port2 mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Normal] [IrDA] [ASK IR] P a r a l l e l P o r t A d d r e s s [ 3 7 8 ] Allows you to select the Parallel Port base addresses. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [378] [278] [3BC] P a r a l l e l P o r t M o d e [ N o r m a l ] Allows you to select the Parallel Port mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Normal] [Bi-directional] [ECP] [EPP] [ECP & EPP] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Conï¬Âguration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ7]
4 - 2 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 4 . 5 P C I P n P The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. Take caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect ï¬Âeld values can cause the system to malfunction. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] NO : L ets th e B IOS co nï¬Âg ue all th e de vic es in the sy ste m. YE S: Let s t he op era tin g s yst em co nï¬Âg ure Pl ug and Pl ay (P nP) de vic es not re qui red fo r b oot if yo ur sys tem ha s a Pl ug an d P lay op era tin g sy ste m. P l u g A n d P l a y O / S [ N o ] When set to [No], BIOS conï¬Âgures all the devices in the system. When set to [Yes] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system conï¬Âgures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. Conï¬Âguration options: [No] [Yes] P C I L a t e n c y T i m e r [ 6 4 ] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register. Conï¬Âguration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] A l l o c a t e I R Q t o P C I V G A [ Y e s ] When set to [Yes], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Conï¬Âguration options: [No] [Yes] P a l e t t e S n o o p i n g [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], the pallete snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] I R Q - x x a s s i g n e d t o [ P C I D e v i c e ] When set to [PCI Device], the speciï¬Âc IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Conï¬Âguration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved]
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 2 7 4 . 5 P o w e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n The Power Conï¬Âguration menu items allow you to change the settings for the ACPI and Advanced Power Management (APM) features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬Âguration options. A C P I A P I C S u p p o r t [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Conï¬Âguration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conï¬Âguration Hardware Monitor Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Include ACPI APIC table pointer to RSDT pointer list. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Sever Boot Exit Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power Enable or disable APM. APM Conï¬Âguration Power Management/APM [Enabled] Video Power Down Mode [Suspend] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend] Standby Time Out [Disabled] Suspend Time Out [Disabled] Throttle Slow Clock Ratio [50%] System Thermal [Disabled] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Last State] Resume On Ring [Disabled] Resume On LAN [Disabled] Resume On By PME# [Disabled] Resume On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] P o w e r M a n a g e m e n t [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the motherboard Advance Power Management (APM) feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] 4 . 5 . 1 A P M C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 2 8 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p V i d e o P o w e r D o w n M o d e [ S u s p e n d ] Allows you to select the video power down mode Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Standby] [Suspend] H a r d D i s k P o w e r D o w n M o d e [ S u s p e n d ] Allows you to select the hard disk power down mode Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Standby] [Suspend] S t a n d b y T i m e O u t [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to select the speciï¬Âed time at which the system goes on standy mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [1 Min] [2 Min] [4 Min] [8 Min] [10 Min] [20 Min] [30 Min] [40 Min] [50 Min] [60 Min] S u s p e n d T i m e O u t [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to select the speciï¬Âed time at which the system goes on suspend mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [1 Min] [2 Min] [4 Min] [8 Min] [10 Min] [20 Min] [30 Min] [40 Min] [50 Min] [60 Min] T h r o t t l e S l o w C l o c k R a t i o [ 5 0 % ] Allows you to select duty cycle in throttle mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [87.5%] [75.0%] [62.5%] [50.0%] [37.5%] [25.0%] [12.5%] S y s t e m T h e r m a l [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the system thermal control feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] T h e r m a l A c t i v e T e m p e r a t u r e [ 6 0 ú C / 1 4 0 ú F ] Allows you to specify the system thermal control activating temperature. Conï¬Âguration options: [40úC/104úF] [45úC/113úF] [50úC/122úF] [55úC/131úF] [60úC/140úF] [65úC/149úF] [70úC/158úF] [75úC/167úF] T h e r m a l S l o w C l o c k R a t i o [ 5 0 % ] Allows you to select the duty cycle in the throttle when a thermal override condition occurs. Conï¬Âguration options: [87.5%] [75.0%] [62.5%] [50%] [37.5%] [25%] [12.5%] P o w e r B u t t o n F u n c t i o n [ O n / O f f ] Allows the system to go into On/Off mode or suspend mode when the power button is pressed. Conï¬Âguration options: [On/Off] [Suspend] The Thermal Active Temperature and Thermal Slow Clock Ratio items appear only when the System Thermal item is set to Enabled.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 2 9 R e s t o r e o n A C P o w e r L o s s [ L a s t S t a t e ] When set to Power Off, the system goes into off state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Conï¬Âguration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] R e s u m e O n R i n g [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], the system enables the RI to generate a wake event while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] R e s u m e O n L A N [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], the system enables the LAN to generate a wake event while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] R e s u m e O n B y P M E # [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], the system enables the PME to generate a wake event while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] R e s u m e O n B y R T C A l a r m [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to [Enabled], the items RTC Alarm Date, RTC Alarm Hour, RTC Alarm Minute, and RTC Alarm Second appear with set values. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following items appear only when the Resume On By RTC Alarm item is set to Enabled. RTC Alarm Date (Days) [15] To set the alarm date, highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection. Conï¬Âguration options: [Everyday] [1] [2] [3]...[31] System Time [12:30:30] To set the alarm time, highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection.
4 - 3 0 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p P o w e r O n B y P S / 2 K e y b o a r d [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to use speciï¬Âc keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] P o w e r O n B y P S / 2 M o u s e [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4 . 5 . 2 H a r d w a r e M o n i t o r Hardware Monitor CPU1 Temperature [49úC/120úF] MB Temperature [47úC/114úF] CPU Fan1 Speed [3884RPM] CPU Fan2 Speed [N/A] Front Fan1 Speed [N/A] Front Fan2 Speed [N/A] Rear Fan1 Speed [N/A] Rear Fan2 Speed [N/A] Smart Fan Control [Smart Fan II] CPU1 Temperature [061] MB Temperature [050] VCORE1 Voltage [ 1.320V] VCORE2 Voltage [ 1.258V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.345V] 5V Voltage [ 5.094V] Use the arrow down key to display additional items. 5VSB Voltage [ 4.980V] VBAT Voltage [ 3.120V] 12V Voltage [12.053V] C P U 1 T e m p e r a t u r e [ x x x ú C / x x x ú F ] M B T e m p e r a t u r e [ x x x ú C / x x x ú F ] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Ignored] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU1 Temperature
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 3 1 C P U F a n 1 / 2 S p e e d [ x x x x R P M ] o r [ N / A ] F r o n t F a n 1 / 2 S p e e d [ x x x x R P M ] o r [ N / A ] R e a r F a n 1 / 2 S p e e d [ x x x x R P M ] o r [ N / A ] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU, front, and rear fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the ï¬Âeld shows N/A. S m a r t F a n C o n t r o l [ S m a r t F a n I I ] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Smart Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efï¬Âcient system operation. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Smart Fan] [Smart Fan II] The CPU1 T empe rature and MB Temper atur e items appea r wh en you set the Smart Fan Control item t o [Sma rt F an] or [Sm art Fan II]. C P U 1 T e m p e r a t u r e [ X X X ] M B T e m p e r a t u r e [ X X X ] Displays the detected CPU and system threshold temperature when the Smart Fan Control is enabled. V C O R E 1 V o l t a g e , V C O R E 2 V o l t a g e , 3 . 3 V V o l t a g e , 5 V V o l t a g e , 5 V S B V o l t a g e , V B A T V o l t a g e , 1 2 V V o l t a g e The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage outputs through the onboard voltage regulators.
4 - 3 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p R e m o t e A c c e s s [ E n a b l e d ] Enables or disables the remote access feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Server Select Remote Access type. Conï¬Âgure Remote Access type and parameters Remote Access [Enabled] Serial port number [COM1] Baudrate [19200] Flow Control [None] Redirection After BIOS POST [Always] Terminal Type [ANSI] VT-UTFB Combo Key Support [Disabled] Meida Type [Serial] The following items appear only when the Remote Access item is set to [Enabled]. 4.6 Server menu The Server menu items allow you to customize the server features. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Sever Boot Exit Conï¬Âgure Remote Access. Server Features Remote Access Conï¬Âguration R e m o t e A c c e s s C o n f i g u r a t i o n The items in this menu allows you to conï¬Âgure the Remote Access features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬Âguration options.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 3 3 S e r i a l p o r t n u m b e r [ C O M 1 ] Allows you to select serial port for console redirection. Conï¬Âguration options: [COM1] [COM2] B a u d r a t e [ 1 9 2 0 0 ] Selects the Baudrate for the Serial port. Conï¬Âguration options: [115200] [57600] [38400] [19200] [9600] F l o w C o n t r o l [ N o n e ] Allows you to select the ï¬Âow control for console redirection. Conï¬Âguration options: [None] [Hardware] [Software] R e d i r e c t i o n A f t e r B I O S P O S T [ A l w a y s ] Sets the redirection mode after the BIOS Power-On Self-Test (POST). Some operating systems may not work when this item is set to Always. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Boot Loader] [Always] T e r m i n a l T y p e [ A N S I ] Allows you to select the target terminal type. Conï¬Âguration options: [ANSI] [VT100] [VT-UTF8] V T - U T F 8 C o m b o K e y S u p p o r t [ D i s a b l e d ] Enables or disables the VT-UTF8 combo key support for ANSI or VT100 terminals. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] M e d i a T y p e [ S e r i a l ] Selects the media for console redirection. Conï¬Âguration options: [Serial] [LAN] [Serial LAN]
4 - 3 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4.7 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Boot Settings Boot Priority Boot Settings Conï¬Âguration Security Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Speciï¬Âes the Boot Device Priority sequence. A virtual ï¬Âoppy disk drive (Floppy Drive B:) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the ï¬Ârst boot device. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit 4 . 7 . 1 B o o t D e v i c e P r i o r i t y Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Speciï¬Âes the boot sequence from the available devices. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding menu. Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY Drive] 2nd Boot Device [Network: MBA v7.7.5] 3rd Boot Device [Network: MBA v7.7.5] 1 s t B o o t D e v i c e [ 1 s t F L O P P Y D r i v e ] 2 n d B o o t D e v i c e [ N e t w o r k : M B A v 7 . 7 . 5 ] 3 r d B o o t D e v i c e [ N e t w o r k : M B A v 7 . 7 . 5 ] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. Conï¬Âguration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled]
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 3 5 4 . 7 . 2 B o o t S e t t i n g s C o n f i g u r a t i o n Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system. Boot Settings Conï¬Âguration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Enabled] Q u i c k B o o t [ E n a b l e d ] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] F u l l S c r e e n L o g o [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. B o o t u p N u m - L o c k [ O n ] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Conï¬Âguration options: [Off] [On] P S / 2 M o u s e S u p p o r t [ A u t o ] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] W a i t f o r û F 1 ü I f E r r o r [ E n a b l e d ] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] H i t û D E L ü M e s s a g e D i s p l a y [ E n a b l e d ] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âÂÂPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] I n t e r r u p t 1 9 C a p t u r e [ E n a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4 - 3 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 7 . 3 S e c u r i t y The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬Âguration options. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Password C h a n g e S u p e r v i s o r P a s s w o r d Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. To set a Supervisor Password: 1. Sel ect t he C hange Superv isor P asswor d item , t hen pr ess <E nter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conï¬Ârm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. To change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear clear it by erasing the CMOS Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM. See section âÂÂ2.6 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. To cl ear th e s upe rvi sor pa ssw ord , s ele ct the Ch ang e S upe rvi sor Pa ssw ord th en pr ess <E nte r>. Th e m ess age âÂÂP ass wor d U nin sta lle dâ app ear s.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 3 7 After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] U s e r A c c e s s L e v e l [ F u l l A c c e s s ] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Conï¬Âguration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility. View Only allows access but does not allow change to any ï¬Âeld. Limited allows changes only to selected ï¬Âelds, such as Date and Time. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the ï¬Âelds in the Setup utility. C h a n g e U s e r P a s s w o r d Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. To set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conï¬Ârm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully. To change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password.
4 - 3 8 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p C l e a r U s e r P a s s w o r d Select this item to clear the user password. P a s s w o r d C h e c k [ S e t u p ] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility. When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Conï¬Âguration options: [Setup] [Always]
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 3 9 4.8 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Sever Boot Exit Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults If you made changes to any of the settings in the menus, pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. A conï¬Ârmation window appears and prompts you to either save your changes or cancel the command. Select one of the options from this menu to exit. E x i t & S a v e C h a n g e s Select this option then press <Enter>, or simply press <F10>, to save your changes to CMOS before exiting the Setup utility. When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to save your changes and exit Setup. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu. E x i t & D i s c a r d C h a n g e s Select this option then press <Enter> to exit the Setup utility without saving your changes. When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to discard your changes and exit Setup. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu. D i s c a r d C h a n g e s Select this option then press <Enter> to discard the changes that you made, and restore the previously saved settings. When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to discard the changes, and load the previously saved settings. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu.
4 - 4 0 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p L o a d S e t u p D e f a u l t s Select this option then press <Enter> to load the optimized settings for each of the Setup menu items. When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to load the default settings. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu.
5 RAID conï¬Âguration This chapter provides instructions for setting up, creating, and conï¬Âguring RAID sets using the available utilities.
A S U S P 5 M T - S Chapter summary 5 5.1 Setting up RAID .................................................................... 5-1 5.2 LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility ...................... 5-4 5.3 Global Array Manager .......................................................... 5-30 5.4 Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility .......................................... 5-31
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 1 5.1 Setting up RAID The motherboard comes with the following RAID solutions: ⢠LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID technology embedded in the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge supports up to four SATA hard disk drives and RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 0 1 configurations. ⢠Adaptec î AIC-7901X PCI-X SCSI controller supports SCSI hard disk drives and RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 configurations. 5 . 1 . 1 R A I D d e f i n i t i o n s RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. Two hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RA ID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conï¬Âguration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 0 1 is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 0 1 conï¬Âguration you get all the beneï¬Âts of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 conï¬Âgurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. JBOD (Spanning) stands for Just a Bunch of Disks and refers to hard disk drives that are not yet conï¬Âgured as a RAID set. This conï¬Âguration stores the same data redundantly on multiple disks that appear as a single disk on the operating system. Spanning does not deliver any advantage over using separate disks independently and does not provide fault tolerance or other RAID performance beneï¬Âts. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy ï¬Ârst the RAID driver from the support CD to a ï¬Âoppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to Chapter 6 for details.
5 - 2 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 1 . 2 I n s t a l l i n g h a r d d i s k d r i v e s The motherboard supports Serial ATA and SCSI hard disk drives for RAID set conï¬Âguration. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array. To install the SATA hard disks for RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. Install the SATA hard disks into the drive bays following the instructions in the system user guide. 2. Connect a SATA signal cable to the signal connector at the back of each drive and to the SATA connector on the motherboard. 3. Connect a SATA power cable to the power connector on each drive. To install the SCSI hard disks for RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. Install the SCSI hard disks into the drive bays following the instructions in the system user guide. 2. Connect the SCSI interface cable connectors at the back of the SCSI drives. 3. Connect the other end of the SCSI interface cable to the SCSI connector on the motherboard. 5 . 1 . 3 S e t t i n g t h e R A I D i t e m i n B I O S You must set the RAID item in the BIOS Setup before you can create a RAID set from SATA hard disk drives attached to the SATA connectors supported by the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge chip. To do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST. 2. Go to the Main Menu, select IDE Conï¬Âguration, then press <Enter>. 3. Set the ATA/IDE Conï¬Âguration item to [Enhanced], then press <Enter>. 4. Set the Conï¬Âgure SATA As item to [RAID]. 5. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to Chapter 4 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 3 5 . 1 . 4 R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n u t i l i t i e s Depending on the RAID connectors that you use, you can create a RAID set using the utilities embedded in each RAID controller. For example, use the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility if you installed SATA hard disk drives on the SATA connectors supported by the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge and/or the Adaptec SCSISelect (TM) Utility if you installed SCSI hard disk drives to the SCSI connector(s) supported by the Adaptec î AIC-7901X PCI-X SCSI controller. Refer to the succeeding sections for details on how to use each RAID conï¬Âguration utility.
5 - 4 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 3. When the utility main window appears, use the arrow keys to select an option from the Management Menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the Management Menu descriptions on the next page. At the bottom of the screen is the legend box. The keys on the legend box allow you to navigate through the setup menu options or execute commands. The keys on the legend box vary according to the menu level. 5.2 LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility Th e L SI Log ic Emb edd ed SAT A R AID Se tup Ut ili ty all ows yo u t o c rea te RAI D 0 , RA ID 1, or RAI D 1 0 s et( s) fro m S ATA ha rd dis k d riv es con nec ted t o the SA TA co nne cto rs sup por ted by th e m oth erb oar d I CH7R Southbridge chip. To enter the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility: 1. Turn on the system after installing all the SATA hard disk drives. 2. During POST, the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility automatically detects the installed SATA hard disk drives and displays any existing RAID set(s). Press <Ctrl> <M> to enter the utility. The LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID auto conï¬Âgures to RAID 1 when the SATA to RAID Mode is enabled.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 5 M e n u D e s c r i p t i o n Conï¬Âgure Allows you to create RAID 0 or RAID 1 set using the Easy Conï¬Âguration or the New Conï¬Âguration command. This menu also allows you to view, add, or clear RAID conï¬Âgurations or select the boot drive Initialize Allows you to initialize the logical drives of a created RAID set Objects Allows you to initialize logical drives or change the logical drive parameters Rebuild Allows you to rebuild failed drives Check Consistency Allows you to check the data consistency of the logical drives of a created RAID set 5 . 2 . 1 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 0 o r R A I D 1 s e t The LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility allows you to create a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set using two types of conï¬Âgurations: Easy and New. In Easy Conï¬Âguration, the logical drive parameters are set automatically including the size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). In New Conï¬Âguration, you manually set the logical drive parameters and assign the set size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). U s i n g E a s y C o n f i g u r a t i o n To create a RAID set using the Easy Conï¬Âguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conï¬Âgure, then press <Enter>. 2. Us e the ar row ke ys to sel ect Easy Conï¬Âguration, the n p res s < Ent er> .
5 - 6 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬Âgurable array appears on screen. 3. The ARRAY SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SATA ports. Select the drives you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y], where X is the array number, and Y is the drive number. The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 7 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬Âgurable array, then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
5 - 8 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 6. Select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 7. Select the RAID level from the menu, then press <Enter>. Yo u n ee d a t leas t t wo iden tic al ha rd di sk dr ive s when cr eat ing a R AID 1 se t. 8. When creating a RAID 1 set, select Stripe Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. When creating a RAID 0 set, proceed to step 10. 9. Key-in the stripe size, then press <Enter>. For server sys tems, we r ecommen d that you use a low er arr ay b lock si ze. For multim edia compu ter systems used main ly for aud io and vid eo edit ing, we r ecomme nd a higher array blo ck siz e fo r opti mum perform ance.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 9 10. When ï¬Ânished setting the selected logical drive conﬠguration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 12. Follow steps 5 to 10 to conﬠgure additional logical drives. 13. When prompted, save the conﬠguration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu.
5 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n U s i n g N e w C o n f i g u r a t i o n 3. Follow steps 3 to 7 of the previous section. 4. Select Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 5. Key in the desired logical drive size, then press <Enter>. 6. Follow steps 8 to 12 of the previous section to create the RAID set. When a RAI D se t is a lrea dy exis ting, usin g the N ew C onï¬Âgur atio n comm and er ases the e xist ing RAI D conﬠgura tion d ata. If you do no t wa nt to d elete the existi ng R AID set , use the View /Add C onï¬Âg uratio n co mma nd to v iew or cre ate an othe r RAID conï¬Âgu rati on. To create a RAID set using the New Conï¬Âguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conï¬Âgure, then press <Enter>. 2. Use the arrow keys to select New Conï¬Âguration, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 1 1 5 . 2 . 2 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 1 0 s e t You can create a RAID 10 set using four identical hard disk drives. To create a RAID 10 set using the Easy Conï¬Âguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conï¬Âgure, then press <Enter>. 2. Us e the ar row ke ys to sel ect Easy Conï¬Âguration, the n p res s < Ent er> . 3. The ARRAY SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SATA ports. Select the drive(s) you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y], where X is the array number, and Y is the drive number. The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
5 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬Âgurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬Âgurable array, then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 1 3 6. Select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 7. Select RAID 10 from the menu, then press <Enter>. Yo u ne ed at l ea st f ou r id en tic al h ar d d is k dr iv es w he n cre at in g a R AI D 10 s et . 8. Select Stripe Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 9. Key-in the stripe size, then press <Enter>. For server sys tems, we r ecommen d that you use a low er arr ay b lock si ze. For multim edia compu ter systems used main ly for aud io and vid eo edit ing, we r ecomme nd a higher array blo ck siz e fo r opti mum perform ance.
5 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 10. When ï¬Ânished setting the selected logical drive conﬠguration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 11. When prompted, save the conﬠguration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 1 5 5 . 2 . 3 A d d i n g o r v i e w i n g a R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n You can add a new RAID conï¬Âguration or view an existing conï¬Âguration using the View/Add Conï¬Âguration command. A d d i n g a n e w R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n To add a new RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. Fro m the Ma nag eme nt Men u, hig hli ght Con ï¬Âgu re, th en pre ss <En ter >. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Vie w/Add Conï¬Âgu ration , then press <Enter>. 3. The ARR AY SEL ECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SATA ports. Select the drive(s) you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READ Y to ONLIN A[X]-[ Y], where X is the array number, and Y is the drive number. The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
5 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬Âgurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬Âgurable array, then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 1 7 6. Follow steps 6 to 7 of the Creating a RAID set: Using Easy Conï¬Âguration section. 7. Select Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 8. Key-in the desired logical drive size, then press <Enter>. 9. Follow steps 8 to 13 of the Creating a RAID set: Using Easy Conï¬Âguration section to add the new RAID conï¬Âguration.
5 - 1 8 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 2 . 4 I n i t i a l i z i n g t h e l o g i c a l d r i v e s After creating the RAID set(s), you must initialize the logical drives. You may initialize the logical drives of a RAID set(s) using the Initialize or Objects command on the Management Menu. U s i n g t h e I n i t i a l i z e c o m m a n d To initialize the logical drive using the Initialize command: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Initialize, then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to initialize. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 1 9 3. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. You may also press <F10> to initialize the drive without conï¬Ârmation. Initializing a logical drive(s) erases all data on the drive. 4. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization.
5 - 2 0 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>. U s i n g t h e O b j e c t s c o m m a n d To initialize the logical drives using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Objects, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 2 1 2. Select Logical Drive from the Objects sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 3. Select the logical drive to initialize from the Logical Drives sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 4. Select Initialize from the pop-up menu, then press <Enter> to start initialization.
5 - 2 2 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. You may also press <F10> to initialize the drive without conï¬Ârmation. 6. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization. 7. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 2 3 5 . 2 . 5 R e b u i l d i n g f a i l e d d r i v e s You can manually rebuild failed hard disk drives using the Rebuild command in the Management Menu. To rebuild a failed hard disk drive: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Rebuild, then press <Enter>. 2. The PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SATA ports. Select the drive you want to rebuild, then press <SpaceBar>.
5 - 2 4 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 3. After selecting the drive to rebuild, press <F10>. The indicator for the selected drive now shows RBLD. 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to rebuild the drive. 5. When rebuild is complete, press any key to continue.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 2 5 5 . 2 . 6 C h e c k i n g t h e d r i v e s f o r d a t a c o n s i s t e n c y You can check and verify the accuracy of data redundancy in the selected logical drive. The utility can automatically detect and/or detect and correct any differences in data redundancy depending on the selected option in the Objects > Adapter menu. The Check Consistency command is available only for logical drives included in a RAID 1 set. U s i n g t h e C h e c k C o n s i s t e n c y To check data consistency using the Check Consistency command: 1. From the Management Menu, select Check Consistency, then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to check. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <Enter>.
5 - 2 6 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 3. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Consistency Check dialog box, then press <Enter>. You may also press <F10> to check the drive consistency. A progress bar appears on screen. 4. While checking the disk consistency, press <Esc> to display the following options. ⢠Stop - Stops the consistency check. The utility stores the percentage of disk checked. When you restart checking, it continues from the last percentage completed rather than from zero percent. ⢠Continue - Continues the consistency check. ⢠Abort - Aborts the consistency check. When you restart checking, it continues from zero percent. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 2 7 U s i n g t h e O b j e c t s c o m m a n d To check data consistency using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects, then select Logical Drive from the menu. 2. Use the arrow keys to select the logical dri ve you want to check, then press <Enter>. 3 . Se le ct C he ck C on si st en cy f ro m th e po p- up m en u, t he n pr es s <E nt er >. 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to check the drive. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue.
5 - 2 8 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 2 . 7 D e l e t i n g a R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n To delete a RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. From the Management Menu, select Conï¬Âgure > Clear Conï¬Âguration, then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Clear Conï¬Âguration? dialog box, then press <Enter>. The utility clears the current array. 3. Press any key to continue.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 2 9 5 . 2 . 8 S e l e c t i n g t h e b o o t d r i v e f r o m a R A I D s e t You must have created a new RAID conï¬Âguration before you can select the boot drive from a RAID set. Refer to the Creating a RAID set: Using New Conï¬Âguration section for details. To select the boot drive from a RAID set: 1. From the Management Menu, select Conï¬Âgure > Select Boot Drive, then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select the bootable logical drive from the list, then press <Enter>. 3. The logical drive is selected as boot drive. Press any key to continue.
5 - 3 0 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 2 . 9 E n a b l i n g t h e W r i t e C a c h e You may enable the RAID controllerüs WriteCache option to improve the data transmission performance. Wh en yo u en abl e W rite Cac he, y ou ma y l os e da ta whe n a pow er in ter ru pti on oc cur s whi le tra nsm itt in g o r exc ha ngi ng da ta amo ng the dri ves . To enable WriteCache: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects > Adapter, then press <Enter> to display the adapter properties. 2. Select WriteCache, then press <Enter> to turn the option On (enabled). 5.3 Global Array Manager You may also create a RAID set(s) in Windows î operating environment using the Global Array Manager (GAM) application. The GAM application is available from the motherboard support CD. 3. When ï¬Ânished, press any key to continue. Refer to the GAM user guide in the motherboard support CD for details.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 3 1 5.4 Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility The Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 10 set(s) from SCSI hard disk drives connected to the SCSI connector supported by the embedded Adaptec î SCSI controller. To enter the Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility: 1. Turn on the system after installing all the SCSI hard disk drives. 2. During POST, the Adaptec SCSI BIOS automatically detects the installed SCSI hard disk drives and displays any existing RAID set(s). Press <Ctrl> <A> to enter the utility. 3. The utility auto-detects the available SCSI channels. Select the SCSI channel, then press <Enter>.
5 - 3 2 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 4 . 1 C o n f i g u r i n g t h e S C S I c o n t r o l l e r You need to conï¬Âgure the SCSI controller before creating a RAID set. After selecting the SCSI channel to use, the utility prompts you to select from the available options. Use the arrow keys to select Conï¬Âgure/View SCSI Controller Settings, then press <Enter>. 5 . 4 . 2 E n a b l i n g t h e H o s t R A I D c o n t r o l l e r To enable the Adaptec HostRAID controller: 1. Use the arrow keys to select the HostRAID item in the Conï¬Âguration section. 2. Press <Enter> to set the item to Enabled. 3. Press <Esc> to exit. 4. When the utility prompts you to save the changes, select Yes, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 3 3 5 . 4 . 3 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 0 s e t ( S t r i p e ) To create a RAID 0 set for Performance: 1. After enabling the HostRAID, the utility returns to the initial menu. Use the arrow keys to select Conï¬Âgure/View HostRAID Settings, then press <Enter>. The screen returns to the options menu.
5 - 3 4 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 3. Select RAID-0 (High Performance, No Fault Tolerance) from the Select RAID Type menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the Striping Requirements note at the bottom of the screen to determine the number of hard disk drives required for the selected RAID type. 2. The utility displays the installed SCSI hard disk drives status and menu options. When available, the HDD status shows Free. Press <C>. The utility does not display an installed SCSI HDD(s) with an existing RAID conï¬Âguration or is part of an existing RAID set. Use the SCSI Disk Utilities to reformat the HDD(s), or use the previous RAID card to clear the RAID conï¬Âguration on the HDD(s).
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 3 5 4. Use the arrow keys to select a RAID set member, then press <SpaceBar> to mark. An X mark appears after the selected HDD. 5. Follow step 4 to select other members of the RAID set, then press <Enter> when ï¬Ânished. 6. Select the stripe size from the menu, then press <Enter>. For server sys tems, we r ecommen d that you use a low er arr ay b lock si ze. For multim edia compu ter systems used main ly for aud io and vid eo edit ing, we r ecomme nd a higher array blo ck siz e fo r opti mum perform ance. 7. When prompted, use the keyboard to assign a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>.
5 - 3 6 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 10. The screen displays the information on the created RAID set. Press <Esc> to exit the utility. 8. If you want to make the array bootable, select Yes from the menu, then press <Enter>. 9. When prompted to create the RAID 0 set, select <Yes>, then press <Enter>. A Build Complete message appears to indicate that you have successfully created the RAID 0 set. The utility erases all data from the selected hard disk drives. Make sure to backup all important data before creating a RAID set.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 3 7 5 . 4 . 4 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 1 s e t ( M i r r o r ) To create a RAID 1 set for Fault Tolerance: 1. Follow steps 1 to 2 of the Creating a RAID 0 set section. 2. Select RAID-1 (Fault Tolerance) from the Select RAID Type menu, then press <Enter>. 3. Use the arrow keys to select a RAID set member, then press <SpaceBar> to mark. An X mark appears after the selected HDD. 4. Follow step 3 to select the other members of the RAID set, then press <Enter> when ï¬Ânished. Refer to the Mirroring Requirements note at the bottom of the screen to determine the number of hard disk drives required for the selected RAID type.
5 - 3 8 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 6. Select Create new RAID-1 from the RAID-1 Build Option menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the options description below. 7. When prompted, use the keyboard to assign a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 8. If you want to make the array bootable, select Yes from the menu, then press <Enter>. 9. When prompted to create the RAID 1 set, select <Yes>, then press <Enter>. The utility erases all data from the selected hard disk drives. Make sure to backup all important data before creating a RAID set. 10. When a conï¬Ârmation dialogue box appears, select <Yes>, then press <Enter>. ⢠Create a New RAID-1 - The default option. Select this option when creating a new RAID 1 set. ⢠Copy from ( 0) to ( 1) - Select this option when you want to copy the source drive contents to a target drive, provided that the source is equal to or smaller than the target drive. ⢠Copy from ( 1) to ( 0) - Select this option when you want to copy the source drive contents to a target drive, provided that the source is larger than the target drive.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 3 9 A Build Complete message appears to indicate that you have successfully created the RAID 1 set. 11. The utility builds the RAID 1 set and displays a progress bar at the center of the screen. Press <Esc> if you want to stop the building process. 12. The screen displays the information on the created RAID set. Press <Esc> to exit the utility.
5 - 4 0 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 4 . 5 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 1 0 s e t ( S t r i p e M i r r o r ) To create a RAID 10 set for Fault Tolerance and Performance: 1. After enabling the HostRAID, the utility returns to the initial menu. Use the arrow keys to select Conï¬Âgure/View HostRAID Settings, then press <Enter>. 2. The utility displays the SCSI hard disk drives installed in your computer and the menu options. Press <C>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 4 1 3. Select RAID-10 (Fault Tolerance, High Performance) from the Select RAID Type menu, then press <Enter>. 4. Use the arrow keys to select a RAID set member, then press <SpaceBar> to mark. An X mark appears after the selected HDD. 5. Follow the step 4 to select the other members of the RAID set, then press <Enter> when ï¬Ânished. Refer to the Striping/Mirroring Requirements note at the bottom of the screen to determine the number of hard disk drives required for the selected RAID type.
5 - 4 2 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 6. Select the stripe size from the menu, then press <Enter>. For server sys tems, we r ecommen d that you use a low er arr ay b lock si ze. For multim edia compu ter systems used main ly for aud io and vid eo edit ing, we r ecomme nd a higher array blo ck siz e fo r opti mum perform ance. 7. When prompted, use the keyboard to assign a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 8. If you want to make the array bootable, select Yes from the menu, then press <Enter>. 9. When prompted to create the RAID 10 set, select <Yes>, then press <Enter>. A Build Complete message appears to indicate that you have successfully created the RAID 10 set. The utility erases all data from the selected hard disk drives. Make sure to backup all important data before creating a RAID set.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 4 3 10. The screen displays the information on the created RAID set. Press <Esc> to exit the utility.
5 - 4 4 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 4 . 6 A d d i n g a s p a r e d r i v e t o a R A I D 1 0 s e t To add a spare drive to a RAID 10 set: 1. Press <S> from the Conï¬Âgure/View Host RAID Settings menu. 2. Select Add Spare from the Options menu, then press <Enter>. 3. Use the arrow keys to select the spare drive from the list, then press <Enter>. 4. When a conï¬Ârmation dialogue box appears, select <Yes>, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 4 5 5. The screen displays the information on the added spare drive. Press <Esc> to exit the utility. 5 . 4 . 7 D e l e t i n g a R A I D 1 0 s e t s p a r e d r i v e To delete a RAID 10 set spare drive: 1. From the utility main menu, press <S>, select Delete Spare from the Options menu, then press <Enter>.
5 - 4 6 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 3. When a conï¬Ârmation dialogue box appears, select <Yes>, then press <Enter> to delete the spare drive. 4. Press <ESC> to exit the utility. 2. The screen displays the available spare drive(s). Use the arrow keys to select the spare drive you want to delete, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 4 7 5 . 4 . 8 D e l e t i n g a R A I D s e t To delete a RAID set: 1. Press <D> from the Conï¬Âgure/View Host RAID Settings menu. 3. When prompted, select Yes from the Delete Array? menu, then press <Enter>. You lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID set. Make sure to backup all important data before deleting a RAID set. 4. Press <ESC> to exit the utility. 2. For RAID 0 and RAID 10 set, go to step 3. For a RAID 1 set, select a delete option from the menu (see below), then go to step 3. ⢠Drive ID 1 - Deletes all data on drive 1 ⢠Drive ID 2 - Deletes all data on drive 2 ⢠Drive ID 1 & 2 - Deletes all data on both drives ⢠None - Breaks the array but keeps all existing data on both drives
5 - 4 8 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 4 . 9 R e b u i l d i n g a R A I D s e t 2. Press <R>. The rebuild option is available only for RAID 1 and RAID 10 sets. To rebuild a RAID set: 1. From the main menu, select the RAID set you want to rebuild, then press <Enter>. While rebuilding the array, you can press <Esc> to stop. A pop-up menu appears for conï¬Ârmation. Select Yes to stop rebuilding and return to the main menu. A Build/Rebuild Completed message appears on screen to indicate that you have successfully rebuilt the array. 3. Press any key to return to the main menu.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 4 9 5 . 4 . 1 0 V e r i f y i n g a R A I D s e t h a r d d i s k d r i v e To verify a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. Select SCSI Disk Utilities from the main menu options, then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the RAID set drives. Use the arrow keys to select the hard disk drive you want to verify, then press <Enter>.
5 - 5 0 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 3. Select Verify Disk Media from the menu, then press <Enter>. 4. After verifying the hard disk drive, press <Esc> to exit the utility. You can also use the SCSI Disk Utilities to format the hard disk drive. 5 . 4 . 1 1 M a k i n g a R A I D s e t b o o t a b l e To make a RAID set bootable: 1. Select SCSI Disk Utilities from the main menu options, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 5 1 2. Select the RAID set you want to make bootable, then press <Enter>. 4. When prompted, select Mark bootable, then press <Enter>. 3. Press <B> when the RAID set information displays on screen. The letter âÂÂBâ appears before a bootable RAID set for easy identiï¬Âcation.
5 - 5 2 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n
6 Driver installation This chapter provides instructions for installing the necessary drivers for different system components.
A S U S P 5 M T - S Chapter summary 6 6.1 RAID driver installation .......................................................... 6-1 6.2 LAN driver installation ........................................................ 6-11 6.3 VGA driver installation ........................................................ 6-13 6.4 Management applications and utilities installation .............. 6-15
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 1 6.1 RAID driver installation After creating the RAID sets for your server system, you are now ready to install an operating system to the independent hard disk drive or bootable array. This part provides instructions on how to install the RAID controller drivers during OS installation. 6 . 1 . 1 C r e a t i n g a R A I D d r i v e r d i s k You may have to use another system to create the RAID driver disk from the system/motherboard support CD or from the Internet. A ï¬Âoppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î 2000 or Red Hat î Enterprise ver. 3.0/SuSE operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. You can create a RAID driver disk in DOS (using the Makedisk application in the support CD). To create a RAID driver disk in DOS environment: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Restart the computer, then enter the BIOS Setup. 3. Select the optical drive as the ï¬Ârst boot priority to boot from the support CD. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. 4. Restart the computer. 5. Press any key when prompted to boot from CD. The Makedisk menu appears. Loading FreeDOS FAT KERNEL GO! Press any key to boot from CDROM... 6. Place a blank, high-density ï¬Âoppy disk to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then select the type of RAID driver disk you want to create by typing the number before the option 7. Press <Enter>. 8. Follow screen instructions to create the driver disk. For system s wi th Red Hat î Enterprise versions that are not listed in the Makedisk menu, explore the support CD and copy the RAID driver disk from the following path: \Drivers\ICH7R\LSI\Linux. A) Fre eD OS c omma nd p romp t B) Broadcom ASF Firmware Update C) Create 7901/7902 HostRAID for RHEL3UP6 Driver Disk D) Create 7901/7902 HostRAID for Windows Driver Disk E) Create 7901/7902 SCSI for Windows Driver Disk F) Create LSI ICH7R MegaRAID IDE Driver for Windows 32/64 bit Driver Disk G) Create LSI ICH7R MegaRAID IDE Driver for RHEL3UP6 driver H) Create ICH7R Intel Matrix Storage for Windows 32 bit driver disk I) Create ICH7R Intel Matrix Storage for Windows 64 bit driver disk Please choose A To I:
6 - 2 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6 . 1 . 2 I n s t a l l i n g t h e R A I D c o n t r o l l e r d r i v e r W i n d o w s î 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r O S During Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS installation To install the RAID controller driver when installing Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Boot the computer using the Windows î 2000/2003 Server installation CD. The Windows î 2000/2003 Setup starts. 2. Press <F6> when the message âÂÂPress F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver...â appears at the bottom of the screen. 3. When prompted, press <S> to specify an additional device.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 3 4. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. 5. Select the RAID controller driver from the list, then press <Enter>. ⢠For Intel î ICH7R LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID driver, select LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID. ⢠For Adaptec î AIC-7901X SCSI RAID driver, select Adaptec HostRAID U320 Driver ver. 1.02 for Windows 2000/XP/2003. 6. The Windows î 2000/2003 Setup loads the RAID controller drivers from the RAID driver disk. When prompted, press <Enter> to continue installation. 7. Setup then proceeds with the OS installation. Follow screen instructions to continue.
6 - 4 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5. Right-click the RAID controller item, then select Properties. 6. Click the Driver tab, then click the Update Driver button. 7. The Upgrade Device Driver Wizard window appears. Click Next. 8. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. 9. Select the option âÂÂSearch for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)âÂÂ, then click Next. 10. The wizard searches the RAID controller drivers. When found, click Next to install the drivers. 11. Click Finish after the driver installation is done. To an existing Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS To install the RAID controller driver on an existing Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Restart the computer, then log in with Administrator privileges. 2. Windows î automatically detects the RAID controller and displays a New Hardware Found window. Click Cancel. 3. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows î desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 4. Click the Hardware tab then click the Device Manager button to display the list of devices installed in the system.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 5 To verify the RAID controller driver installation: 1. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows î desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 2. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button. 3. Click the â â sign before the item SCSI and RAID controllers. The LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID and Adaptec AIC-7901 - Ultra320 SCSI Driver items should appear. 4. Right-click the RAID controller driver item, then select Properties from the menu. 5. Click the Driver tab, then click the Driver Details button to display the RAID controller drivers. 6. Click OK when ï¬Ânished.
6 - 6 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n R e d H a t î E n t e r p r i s e v e r . 3 . 0 To install the Intel î ICH7R LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID controller driver when installing Red Hat î Enterprise ver. 3.0 operating system: 1. Boot the system from the Red Hat î Installation CD. 2. At the boot:, type linux dd , then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 7 4. Select fd0 using the <Tab> key when asked to select the driver disk source. Press <Tab> to move the cursor to OK, then press <Enter>. 3. Select Yes using the <Tab> key when asked if you have the driver disk. Press <Enter>
6 - 8 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6. When asked if you will load additional RAID controller drivers, select Yes, then install the additional RAID controller drivers (for Adaptec AIC-7901 PCI-X SCSI controller). 7. Follow screen instructions to continue the OS installation. 5. When prompted, insert the Red Hat î Enterprise ver. 3.0 RAID driver disk to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, select OK, then press <Enter>. The drivers for the RAID controller are installed to the system.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 9 S u S E L i n u x To install the RAID controller driver when installing SuSE Linux OS: 1. Boot the system from the SuSE Installation CD. 2. Select Installation from the Boot Options menu, then press <Enter>. 3. A message instructs you to prepare the RAID driver disk. Press <F6>. For SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9.0 SP1 operating system, locate the Adaptec SCSI RAID driver in support CD under the following path: \Drivers\adaptec\7901_7902\HostRAID\Linux. Do not use OS bundled driver, otherwise your computer may become unstable due to OS limitation.
6 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 4. When prompted, insert the RAID driver disk to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. 5. When prompted, select the ï¬Âoppy disk drive (fd0) as the driver update medium, select OK, then press <Enter>. The drivers for the RAID controller are installed to the system.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 1 1 6.2 LAN driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the Broadcom î Gigabit LAN controller drivers. 6 . 2 . 1 W i n d o w s î 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r To install the Broadcom î Gigabit LAN controller driver on a Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Restart the computer, then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. ⢠Wi ndo ws î automatically detects the LAN controllers and displays a New Hardware Found window. Click Cancel to close this window. ⢠If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the ï¬Âle ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double-click the ASSETUP.EXE to run the CD. 3. Click the Broadcom Lan Driver option to begin installation.
6 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6 . 2 . 2 R e d H a t î E n t e r p r i s e v e r . 3 . 0 Follow these instructions when installing the Broadcom î Gigabit LAN controller base driver for the Red Hat î Enterprise ver. 3.0 operating system. B u i l d i n g t h e d r i v e r f r o m t h e T A R f i l e 4. Click Next when the InstallShield Wizard window appears. Follow screen instructions to continue installation. To build the driver from the TAR ï¬Âle: 1. Create a directory and extract the TAR ï¬Âles: tar xvzf bcm5700-<version>.tar.gz 2. Bui ld th e d riv er bcm 570 0.o as a loadab le mod ule fo r the runnin g kern el: cd bcm5700-<version>/src make 3. Test the driver by loading it: insmod bcm5700.o 4. Install the driver and man page: make install 5. Refer to Red Hat distribution documentation to conï¬Âgure the network protocol and address. Install ï¬Ârst the Kernel Development tools before building the driver from the TAR ï¬Âle.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 1 3 6.3 VGA driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the ATI î RAGE XL Video Graphics Adapter (VGA) driver. 6 . 3 . 1 W i n d o w s î 2 0 0 0 S e r v e r You need to manually install the ATI î RAGE XL VGA driver on a Windows î 2000 Server operating system. To install the ATI î RAGE XL VGA driver: 1. Restart the computer, then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The support CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. Windows î automatically detects the LAN controller and displays a New Hardware Found window. Click Cancel to close this window. 3. Cl ic k t he ite m A TI Ra ge XL Dis pla y Dr ive r f rom th e Dr ive rs men u. 4. The AT I Windows 2000 Driver window appears. Click Ne xt. Follow screen instructions to complete installation.
6 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6 . 3 . 2 W i n d o w s î 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r The Windows î 2003 Server operating system automatically recognizes the ATI î RAGE XL VGA driver during system installation. There is no need to install an additional driver(s) to support the onboard VGA. 6 . 3 . 3 R e d H a t î E n t e r p r i s e v e r . 3 . 0 The Red Hat î Enterprise ver. 3.0 operating system automatically recognizes the ATI î RAGE XL VGA driver during system installation. There is no need to install an additional driver(s) to support the onboard VGA.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 1 5 6.4 Management applications and utilities installation The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, management applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for updates. 6 . 4 . 1 R u n n i n g t h e s u p p o r t C D Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the ï¬Âle ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double- click the ASSETUP.EXE to run the CD. 6 . 4 . 2 D r i v e r s m e n u The Dr ive rs men u s how s t he ava ila ble de vic e d riv ers if th e s yst em det ect s ins tal led de vic es. In sta ll the ne ces sar y d riv ers to ac tiv ate th e d evi ces . The screen display and driver options vary under different operating system versions.
6 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6 . 4 . 3 M a n a g e m e n t S o f t w a r e m e n u The Management Software menu displays the available network and server monitoring applications. Click on an item to install. 6 . 4 . 4 U t i l i t i e s m e n u The Utilities menu displays the software applications and utilities that the motherboard supports. Click on an item to install. 6 . 4 . 5 C o n t a c t i n f o r m a t i o n Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. You can also ï¬Ând this information on the inside front cover of this user guide.
A Reference information This appendix includes additional information that you may refer to when conï¬Âguring the motherboard.
Appendix summary A A S U S P 5 M T - S A.1 Intel î EM64T ......................................................................... A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) .................... A-1 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ...................................... A-3 A.4 Block diagrams ...................................................................... A-4
A S U S P 5 M T - S A - 1 A.1 Intel î EM64T ⢠The motherboard is fully compatible with Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors running on 32-bit operating systems. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS ï¬Âle that supports EM64T. You can download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle from the ASUS website (www.asus. com/support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS ï¬Âle. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www.intel.com for more information on the EM64T feature. ⢠Vi sit w ww. mi cros oft .co m fo r m ore i nfo rm ati on on W indo ws î 64-bit OS. U s i n g t h e I n t e l î E M 6 4 T f e a t u r e To use the Intel î EM64T feature: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Intel î EM64T. 2. Install a 64-bit operating system (Windows î Server 2003 x64 Edition). 3. Install the 64-bit drivers for the motherboard components and devices from the support CD. 4. Install the 64-bit drivers for expansion cards or add-on devices, if any. A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS ï¬Âle that supports EIST. You can download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle from the ASUS website (www. asus.com/support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www.intel.com for more information on the EIST feature. A . 2 . 1 S y s t e m r e q u i r e m e n t s Before using EIST, check your system if it meets the following requirements: ⢠Inte l î Pentium î 4 processor with EIST support ⢠BIOS ï¬Âle with EIST support ⢠Operating system with EIST support (Windows î Server 2003 SP1/ Linux 2.6 kernel or later versions) Refe r to t he e xpansi on c ard or add-on dev ice(s) doc umenta tion , or vi sit the relate d we bsite, to verify if the car d/devi ce s upport s a 64-bit sys tem.
A - 2 A p p e n d i x : C P U f e a t u r e s A . 2 . 2 U s i n g t h e E I S T To use the EIST feature: 1. Tu rn on th e c omp ute r, the n e nte r t he BIO S S etu p. 2. Go t o t he Adv anc ed Men u, hig hli ght CP U C onﬠgur ati on, then press <Enter>. 3. Set the In tel (R) Sp eed Ste p T ech nol ogy item to [Automatic], then press <Enter>. See page 4-20 for details. 4. Pr es s < F10 > t o s ave yo ur cha nge s a nd exi t t he BIO S s etu p. 5. After the computer restarts, right click on a blank space on the desktop, then select Pr ope rti es from the pop-up menu. 6. When the Di spl ay Pro per tie s window appears, click the Sc ree n Sa ver tab. 7. Click the Po wer button on the Monitor power section to open the Po wer Op tio ns Pro per tie s window. 8 . O n t h e Pow er sch eme s s e c t i o n , c l i c k , t he n s e le c t a ny o p t io n except Home/Ofï¬Âce Desktop or Always On. 9. Click Ap ply , then click OK. 10. Close the Dis pla y P rop ert ies window. Af ter yo u a dju st the po wer sc hem e, the CP U i nte rna l fr equ enc y s lig htl y d ecr eas es wh en the CP U l oad ing is lo w. The screen displays and procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
A S U S P 5 M T - S A - 3 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with Hyper-Threading Technology. ⢠Hy per -T hre ad ing Tec hno logy is su pp ort ed un de r 2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only. Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading Techonology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading Technology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading Technology, visit www. intel.com/info/hyperthreading. U s i n g t h e H y p e r - T h r e a d i n g T e c h n o l o g y To use the Hyper-Threading Technology: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup. Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading Technology is set to Enabled. Se e p age 4- 19 fo r d eta ils . The BIOS item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Techonology. 3. Restart the computer.
A - 4 A p p e n d i x : C P U f e a t u r e s A.4 Block diagrams Northbridge Intel î E7230 LPC-Bus PCI-E interfaces Four DDR2 533/667 DIMM Sockets DMI interface X8 PCI-E 4xDDR2 533/667 DIMM slots (max. 8 GB) SMBus BIOS Flash 8 Mbit USB 1-8 IDE SATA All H/W monitor W83792AD Fan Power Supply EEPROM System informatio n W83627EHG-A PS2 KB/MS Serial Port Floppy Parallel Port PCI Slot 4 PCI 33 bus VGA-Conn. PCI-X Slot 2 X4 PCI-E X1 PCI-E Broadcom BCM5721 LAN Port 1 X1 PCI-E Broadcom BCM575 1 LAN Port 2 PCI-E interfaces Intel î Pentiu m î 4 Pro cessor in the 775-land package with 800/1066 MHz system bus Southbridge Intel î ICH7R ATI Rage XL 8 Mbyte Mini PCI (BMC) PCI-X Slot 3 Intel PCI-X Hub-V (PXH-V) System Bus 64bit, 800 MHz/1066MHz PCIE Slot 1 Adaptec AIC-7901 U320 SCSI
i i E 2 3 7 6 F i r s t E d i t i o n J a n u a r y 2 0 0 6 Copyright é 2006 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiï¬Âed or altered, unless such repair, modiï¬Âcation of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âÂÂAS ISâ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT. SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY, AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identiï¬Âcation or explanation and to the ownersü beneï¬Ât, without intent to infringe.
i i i Contents Notices ............................................................................................... vii Safety information ............................................................................. viii About this guide .................................................................................. ix Typography .......................................................................................... x P5MT-S speciï¬Âcations summary .......................................................... xi C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 Innovative ASUS features ....................................... 1-4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 Onboard LEDs ....................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 Placement direction ................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Screw holes ............................................................. 2-2 2.2.3 Motherboard layout ................................................ 2-3 2.2.4 Layout Contents ..................................................... 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-6 2.3.1 Installing the CPU .................................................... 2-6 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan ......................... 2-9 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan ................... 2-11 2.4 System memory .................................................................. 2-13 2.4.1 Overview ............................................................... 2-13 2.4.2 Memory Conï¬Âgurations ......................................... 2-13 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ................................................... 2-14 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM .................................................. 2-14 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-15 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card .................................. 2-15 2.5.2 Conï¬Âguring an expansion card .............................. 2-15 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments ........................................... 2-16 2.5.4 PCI/PCI-X slots ...................................................... 2-17 2.5.5 PCI Express x16 slot ............................................. 2-17 2.5.6 Mini PCI socket ...................................................... 2-17
i v Contents 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-18 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-23 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .......................................... 2-23 2.7.2 Internal connectors ............................................... 2-24 C h a p t e r 3 : P o w e r i n g u p 3.1 Starting up for the ï¬Ârst time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer ................................................... 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function ........................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch ..................... 3-2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk .............................. 4-1 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility ........................................................ 4-2 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ................................ 4-5 4.1.4 ASUS Update utility ................................................ 4-7 4.2 BIOS setup program ............................................................ 4-10 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ................................................. 4-11 4.2.2 Menu bar ............................................................... 4-11 4.2.3 Navigation keys ..................................................... 4-11 4.2.4 Menu items ........................................................... 4-12 4.2.5 Sub-menu items .................................................... 4-12 4.2.6 Conï¬Âguration ï¬Âelds ............................................... 4-12 4.2.7 Pop-up window ...................................................... 4-12 4.2.8 Scroll bar ............................................................... 4-12 4.2.9 General help .......................................................... 4-12 4.3 Main menu ........................................................................... 4-13 4.3.1 System Time ........................................................ 4-13 4.3.2 System Date ........................................................ 4-13 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ............................................... 4-13 4.3.4 IDE Conï¬Âguration .................................................. 4-14 4.3.5 Primary, Third, Fourth Master/Slave ..................... 4-15 4.3.6 System Information .............................................. 4-17 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-18 4.4.1 MPS Conï¬Âguration ................................................. 4-18
v Contents 4.4.2 CPU Conï¬Âguration ................................................. 4-19 4.4.3 Chipset Conï¬Âguration ........................................... 4-21 4.4.4 Onboard Devices Conï¬Âguration ............................. 4-25 4.4.5 PCI PnP .................................................................. 4-26 4.5 Power Conï¬Âguration ........................................................... 4-27 4.5.1 APM Conï¬Âguration ................................................ 4-27 4.5.2 Hardware Monitor .................................................. 4-30 4.6 Server menu ....................................................................... 4-32 Remote Access Conï¬Âguration ............................................. 4-32 4.7 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-34 4.7.1 Boot Device Priority .............................................. 4-34 4.7.2 Boot Settings Conï¬Âguration ................................. 4-35 4.7.3 Security ................................................................. 4-36 4.8 Exit menu ............................................................................ 4-39 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5.1 Setting up RAID .................................................................... 5-1 5.1.1 RAID deï¬Ânitions ....................................................... 5-1 5.1.2 Installing hard disk drives ........................................ 5-2 5.1.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS ................................. 5-2 5.1.4 RAID conï¬Âguration utility ........................................ 5-3 5.2 LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility ...................... 5-4 5.2.1 Creating a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set ............................. 5-5 5.2.2 Creating a RAID 10 set ......................................... 5-11 5.2.3 Adding or viewing a RAID conï¬Âguration ................ 5-15 5.2.4 Initializing the logical drives .................................. 5-18 5.2.5 Rebuilding failed drives ......................................... 5-23 5.2.6 Checking the drives for data consistency ............. 5-25 5.2.7 Deleting a RAID conï¬Âguration ............................... 5-28 5.2.8 Selecting the boot drive from a RAID set ............. 5-29 5.2.9 Enabling the WriteCache ....................................... 5-30 5.3 Global Array Manager .......................................................... 5-30 5.4 Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility .......................................... 5-31 5.4.1 Conï¬Âguring the SCSI controller ............................. 5-32 5.4.2 Enabling the HostRAID controller .......................... 5-32 5.4.3 Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) .............................. 5-33
v i 5.4.4 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) .............................. 5-37 5.4.5 Creating a RAID 10 set (Stripe Mirror) ................ 5-40 5.4.6 Adding a spare drive to a RAID 10 set ................. 5-44 5.4.7 Deleting a RAID 10 set spare drive ....................... 5-45 5.4.8 Deleting a RAID set ............................................... 5-47 5.4.9 Rebuilding a RAID set ............................................ 5-48 5.4.10 Verifying a RAID set hard disk drive ..................... 5-49 5.4.11 Making a RAID set bootable .................................. 5-50 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6.1 RAID driver installation .......................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk ..................................... 6-1 6.1.2 Installing the RAID controller driver ........................ 6-2 6.2 LAN driver installation ........................................................ 6-11 6.2.1 Windows î 2000/2003 Server .............................. 6-11 6.2.2 Red Hat î Enterprise ver. 3.0 ................................. 6-12 6.3 VGA driver installation ........................................................ 6-13 6.3.1 Windows î 2000 Server ......................................... 6-13 6.3.2 Windows î 2003 Server ......................................... 6-14 6.3.3 Red Hat î Enterprise ver. 3.0 ................................. 6-14 6.4 Management applications and utilities installation .............. 6-15 6.4.1 Running the support CD ........................................ 6-15 6.4.2 Drivers menu ......................................................... 6-15 6.4.3 Management Software menu ................................ 6-16 6.4.4 Utilities menu ........................................................ 6-16 6.4.5 Contact information ............................................. 6-16 A p p e n d i x : R e f e r e n c e i n f o r m a t i o n A.1 Intel î EM64T ......................................................................... A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) .................... A-1 A.2.1 System requirements .............................................. A-1 A.2.2 Using the EIST ......................................................... A-2 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ...................................... A-3 A.4 Block diagram ....................................................................... A-4
v i i Notices F e d e r a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s C o m m i s s i o n S t a t e m e n t This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerüs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. C a n a d i a n D e p a r t m e n t o f C o m m u n i c a t i o n s S t a t e m e n t This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiï¬Âcations to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userüs authority to operate this equipment.
v i i i Safety information E l e c t r i c a l s a f e t y ⢠To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adapter or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to fix it by yourself. Contact a qualified service technician or your retailer. O p e r a t i o n s a f e t y ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately. ⢠To avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry. ⢠Avoid dust, humidity, and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualified service technician or your retailer. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product (electrical and electronic equipment) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products.
i x About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and conï¬Âguring the motherboard. H o w t h i s g u i d e i s o r g a n i z e d This manual contains the following parts: ⢠C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠C h a p t e r 3 : P o w e r i n g u p This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p Tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n Provides information on RAID conï¬Âgurations for this motherboard. ⢠C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n This chapter provides information on RAID and LAN driver installation for this motherboard. ⢠A p p e n d i x : R e f e r e n c e i n f o r m a t i o n This appendix includes additional information that you may refer to when conï¬Âguring the motherboard. W h e r e t o f i n d m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1 . A S U S w e b s i t e s The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2 . O p t i o n a l d o c u m e n t a t i o n Your product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty ï¬Âyers, that may have been added by your dealer. These documents are not part of the standard package.
x C o n v e n t i o n s u s e d i n t h i s g u i d e To make sure that you perform certain tasks properly, take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. Typography Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater-than sign means that you must press the enclosed key. Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key. <Key1> <Key2> <Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl> <Alt> <Del> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: format A:/S DANGER/WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: Tips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORTANT: Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.
x i P5MT-S speciï¬Âcations summary (continued on the next page) C P U C h i p s e t F r o n t S i d e B u s M e m o r y E x p a n s i o n s l o t s * S t o r a g e G r a p h i c s D u a l L A N LGA775 socket for Intel î Pentium î 4/processor Compatible with Intel î PCG 05B/05A and 04B/04A and the latest Intel î dual-core processor Su pp or ts I n te l î E nh an ce d Mem or y 6 4 T ec hno log y (EM 64T ) Supports Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) Supports Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology NorthBridge: Intel î E7230 SouthBridge: Intel î ICH7R I/O bridge : Intel î 6702 PXH-V 1066/800/533 MHz Dual-channel memory architecture 4 x 240-pin DIMM sockets support unbuffered ECC/non-ECC DDR2-533/667 memory modules Supports up to 8 GB system memory 1 x PCI Express x16 slot (x8 link, PCI Express 1.0a) 1 x PCI-X 100 MHz/64-bit slot (PCI-X 1.0) (supports Zero-Channel RAID card, colored green on the model) 1 x PCI-X 100 MHz/64-bit slot (PCI-X 1.0) 1 x PCI 33 MHz/32-bit/5V slot (PCI 2.3) 1 x mini-PCI socket for ASUS î Server Management Board Intel î ICH7R Southbridge supports: - 2 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 hard disk drives - 4 x SATA-300 drives with RAID functionality using the Intel Matrix Storage Manager (under Windows Operating system) or IMSM (RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, and RAID 5), or the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID controller (RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10) Adaptec î AIC-7901X PCI-X SCSI controller supports: - 1 x Ultra-320 SCSI channel with RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 10 conï¬Âguration - Zero-Channel RAID card (optional) ATI î RAGE-XL PCI-based VGA controller Du al e mb ed ded B roa dco m BCM 572 1 Gig abi t LAN co nt ro ll er s t ha t c omp ly wi th PC I Ex pr es s 1. 0a s pe ci ï¬Âc at io ns *Important notes: ⢠A PCI Express x 16 graphics card inserted to the PCI Express x16 slot may run only at x1 speed (Intel spec). ⢠When one PCI-X slot is occupied, the PCI-X frequency is 100 MHz. When two PCI-X slots are occupied, the PCI-X frequency is 66 MHz.
x i i P5MT-S speciï¬Âcations summary U S B S p e c i a l f e a t u r e s B I O S f e a t u r e s R e a r p a n e l I n t e r n a l c o n n e c t o r s P o w e r R e q u i r e m e n t F o r m F a c t o r S u p p o r t C D c o n t e n t s Intel ICH7R Southbridge supports: - 4 USB 2.0 ports (two on the rear panel, two on the front panel) ASUS Smart Fan I/II ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS MyLogo2 AMI BIOS, 8 MB Flash ROM, Green, PnP, DMI, SMBIOS 2.3, WfM2.0, ACPI 2.0a 1 x PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 1 x PS/2 mouse port (green) 2 x USB 2.0 ports 1 x Parallel port 1 x Serial port (COM1) 1 x VGA port 2 x LAN (RJ-45) ports 1 x Floppy disk drive connector 1 x IDE connector 4 x Serial ATA connectors 1 x Hard disk activity LED connector 1 x 68-pin SCSI connector 2 x Front fan connectors 2 x Rear fan connectors 2 x CPU fan connectors 1 x 24-pin ATX power connector 1 x 8-pin ATX 12 V power connector 1 x Power supply SMBUS connector 1 x Serial port (COM2) 1 x USB 2.0 connector for 2 additional USB 2.0 ports 1 x SMBus header for back-plane 1 x 20-1 pin auxiliary panel connector 1 x 20-1 pin system panel connector 1 x Serial port (COM2) connector 1 x ASUS server management (BMC) connector SSI power supply (with 24-pin and 8-pin 12 V plugs) ATX 12 V 2.0 compliant ATX form factor: 12 in x 9.8 in (30.5 cm x 24.9 cm) Device drivers ASUS Live Update utility ASUS Server Web-based Management (ASWM) Anti-virus software *Speciï¬Âcations are subject to change without notice.
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
A S U S P 5 M T - S Chapter summary 1 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2
A S U S P 5 M T - S 1 - 1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS î P5MT-S motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below. 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. Motherboard ASUS P5MT-S motherboard Cables 4 x Serial ATA signal cables 2 x Serial ATA power cables 1 x SCSI Ultra320 cable 80-conductor IDE cable 3-in-1 Floppy/Ultra ATA disk drive cable Accessories I/O shield Application CDs ASUS motherboard support CD Documentation User guide If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer.
1 - 2 C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n 1.3 Special features 1 . 3 . 1 P r o d u c t h i g h l i g h t s L a t e s t p r o c e s s o r t e c h n o l o g y The motherboard comes with a 775-pin surface mount Land Grid Array (LGA) socket designed for the Intel î Pentium î 4 processor in the 775-land package. The motherboard supports the Intel î Pentium î 4 processor with 1066/800/533 MHz Front Side Bus (FSB). The motherboard also supports the Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology and is fully compatible with Intel î 05B/05A or 04B/04A processors. See page 2-6 for details. I n t e l î E M 6 4 T The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 CPUs with the Intel î EM64T (Extended Memory 64 Technology). The Intel î EM64T feature allows your computer to run on 64-bit operating systems and access larger amounts of system memory for faster and more efï¬Âcient computing. See the Appendix for details. E n h a n c e d I n t e l S p e e d S t e p î T e c h n o l o g y ( E I S T ) The Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) intelligently manages the CPU resources by automatically adjusting the CPU voltage and core frequency depending on the CPU loading and system speed or power requirement. See page 4-20 and the Appendix for details. I n t e l î E 7 2 3 0 a n d I n t e l î I C H 7 R c h i p s e t The Intel î E7230 Memory Controller Hub (MCH) and the Intel î ICH7R (I/O controller hub) provide the vital interfaces for the motherboard. Th e M CH pro vid es the pr oce sso r, dua l-c han nel DD R2- 533/667 me mor y, and PC I E xpr ess in ter fac es. Th e I CH is a n ew gen era tio n s erv er cla ss I/O co ntr oll er hu b t hat pr ovi des th e i nte rfa ce for PC I 2 .3, US B 2 .0 , and SA TA amo ng oth ers . D D R 2 - 6 6 7 m e m o r y s u p p o r t Th e m oth erb oar d s upp ort s D DR2 memory which features data transfer rates of up to 667 MHz to meet the higher bandwidth requirements of the latest server applications. The dual-channel memory architecture doubles the bandwidth of your system memory to boost system performance, eliminating bottlenecks with peak bandwidths of up to 10.7 GB/s. P C I E x p r e s s ⢠i n t e r f a c e Th e m oth erb oar d f ull y s upp ort s P CI Exp res s, the latest I/O interconnect technology that speeds up the PCI bus. PCI Express features point-to-point serial interconnections between devices and allows higher clockspeeds by carrying data in packets. This high speed interface is software compatible with existing PCI or PCI-X speciï¬Âcations. See page 2-17 for details.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 1 - 3 U l t r a 3 2 0 S C S I f e a t u r e The Adaptec î AIC-7901X PCI-X SCSI controller is onboard to support one 68-pin Ultra320 SCSI connector, that can connect up to 15 SCSI devices. See page 2-27 and Chapter 5 for details. Z e r o - C h a n n e l R A I D ( Z C R ) c a r d s o l u t i o n The motherboard comes with a PCI-X slot (the green slot on the model) that supports an optional Zero-Channel RAID card. The Zero-Channel RAID card allows you to create all types of RAID conï¬Âgurations for your storage devices. The ZCR capability provides a cost-effective, high-performance, and added reliability for your server system. G i g a b i t L A N s o l u t i o n The motherboard comes with dual Gigabit LAN controllers and ports to provide a total solution for your networking needs. The onboard Broadcom î BCM5721 Gigabit LAN controllers use the PCI Express interface and could achieve network throughput close to Gigabit bandwidth. See page 2-23 for details. S e r i a l A T A I I t e c h n o l o g y The mo the rbo ard su ppo rts th e S eri al ATA II technology through the Serial ATA interfaces controlled by the Intel î ICH7R. The SATA speciï¬Âcation allows for thinner, more ï¬Âexible cables with lower pin count, reduced voltage requirement, and up to 300 MB/s data transfer rate. B u i l t - i n S A T A R A I D s o l u t i o n The Intel î ICH7R allows RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and RAID 5 conï¬Âguration for SATA hard disk drives via the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager (under Windows Operating System) or the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility (no RAID 5). See page 2-25 and Chapter 5 for details. U S B 2 . 0 t e c h n o l o g y The motherboard implements the Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 speciï¬Âcation, dramatically increasing the connection speed from the 12 Mbps bandwidth on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. See pages 2-23 and 2-26 for details.
1 - 4 C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n T e m p e r a t u r e , f a n , a n d v o l t a g e m o n i t o r i n g The CPU temperature is monitored by the ASIC (integrated in the Winbond hardware monitor) to prevent overheating and damage. The system fan rotations per minute (RPM) is monitored for timely failure detection. The ASIC monitors the voltage levels to ensure stable supply of current for critical components. See page 4-30 for details. 1 . 3 . 2 I n n o v a t i v e A S U S f e a t u r e s C r a s h F r e e B I O S 2 Th is fea tur e a llo ws you to re sto re the or igi nal BI OS dat a f rom th e s upp ort CD in ca se whe n t he BIO S c ode s a nd dat a a re cor rup ted . T his pr ote cti on el imi nat es the ne ed to buy a rep lac eme nt ROM ch ip. Se e p age 4-5 for details. A S U S S m a r t F a n t e c h n o l o g y I / I I The motherboard supports both generations of ASUS Smart Fan technology. ASUS Smart Fan technology smartly adjusts the fan speeds according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efï¬Âcient operation. See page 4- 31 for details. A S U S M y L o g o 2 ⢠This new feature present in the motherboard allows you to personalize and add style to your system with customizable boot logos. See page 4-35 for details.
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
A S U S P 5 M T - S Chapter summary 2 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-6 2.4 System memory .................................................................. 2-13 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-15 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-18 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-23
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 1 Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED. The green LED lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. 2.1 Before you proceed Take note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity. ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the ATX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, or components, or all of the above articles. P5MT-S î P5MT-S Onboard LED SB_PWR1 OFF Powered Off ON Standby Power
2 - 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the conï¬Âguration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard ï¬Âts into it. To optimize the motherboard features, we highly recommend that you install it in an SSI EEB 3.5 compliant chassis. Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage to the motherboard components. 2 . 2 . 1 P l a c e m e n t d i r e c t i o n When installing the motherboard, make sure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below. 2 . 2 . 2 S c r e w h o l e s Place nine (9) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. P l a c e t h i s s i d e t o w a r d s t h e r e a r o f t h e c h a s s i s Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. P5MT-S LAN2 î
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 3 2 . 2 . 3 M o t h e r b o a r d l a y o u t P5MT-S 8Mbit Flash BIOS Super I/O PRI_IDE1 25cm (9.8in) 30.5cm (12in) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) SAT A1 A TI RAGE XL VGA Controller AUX_PANEL1 KBPWR1 PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: Keyboard LAN1 LAN2 î USB12 COM1 P ARALLEL PORT VGA1 PCIE1 PCIX3 PCIX2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 SAT A2 SAT A3 SAT A4 PANEL1 RECOVERY1 USB34 USBPW34 HDLED1 BUZZ1 FLOPPY1 BMCCONN1 TRPWR1 BPSMB1 VGA_EN1 SB_PWR1 COM2 LAN_EN2 LAN_EN1 Broadcom BCM5721 Broadcom BCM5721 Intel E7230 Intel 6702 PXH Intel ICH7R BMCSOCKET1 LAN2 LGA775 PCI4 PSUSMB1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power USBPW12 REAR_FAN1 ATX12V2 FM_CPU2 CPU_FAN2 FM_CPU1 CPU_FAN1 CLRTC1 A TXPWR1 REAR_FAN2 RAID_SEL1 Adaptec AIC-7901X SCSI_EN1 SCSIA1
2 - 4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . 2 . 4 L a y o u t c o n t e n t s R e a r p a n e l c o n n e c t o r s P a g e 1. PS/2 mouse port (green) 2-23 2. Parallel port 2-23 3. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 2-23 4. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 2-23 5. Serial (COM1) port 2-23 6. VGA port 2-23 7. Gigabit LAN1 (RJ-45) port 2-23 8. Gigabit LAN2 (RJ-45) port 2-23 S l o t s / S o c k e t s P a g e 1. CPU socket 2-6 2. DDR2 DIMM slots 2-13 3. PCI/PCI-X/PCI Express slots 2-17 4. Mini-PCI socket 2-17 J u m p e r s P a g e 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) 2-18 2. CPU fan pin selection (3-pin FM_CPU1, FM_CPU2) 2-19 3. USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW1, USBPW2) 2-19 4. Keyboard/Mouse power (3-pin KBPWR1) 2-20 5. VGA controller setting (3-pin VGA_EN1) 2-20 6. Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN_EN1; LAN_EN2) 2-21 7. RAID controller selection (3-pin RAID_SEL1) 2-21 8. SCSI controller setting (3-pin SCSI_EN1) 2-22 9. Force BIOS recovery setting (3-pin RECOVERY1) 2-22
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 5 I n t e r n a l c o n n e c t o r s P a g e 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) 2-24 2. Primary IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) 2-24 3. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) 2-25 4. Hard disk activity LED connector (4-pin HDLED1) 2-26 5. USB connector (10-1 pin USB34) 2-26 6. Ultra320 SCSI connector (68-pin SCSIA1) 2-27 7. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) 2-28 8. BMC connector (16-pin BMCCONN1) 2-28 9. Ambient thermal sensor (2-pin TRPWR1) 2-28 10. CPU and system fan connectors (3-pin CPU_FAN1/2, 2-29 REAR_FAN1/2, FRNT_FAN1/2) 11. Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) 2-29 12. Power supply SMBus connector (5-pin PSUSMB1) 2-30 13. SSI power connectors (24-pin ATXPWR1, 8-pin ATX12V2) 2-30 14. Auxiliary panel connector (20-pin AUX_PANEL1) 2-31 15. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) 2-32
2 - 6 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . 3 . 1 I n s t a l l i n g t h e C P U To install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel î Pentium î 4 in the 775-land package. Before installing the CPU, make sure that the cam box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. ⢠Upon purchase of the motherboard, make sure that the PnP cap is on the socket and the socket contacts are not bent. Contact your retailer immediately if the PnP cap is missing, or if you see any damage to the PnP cap/socket contacts/motherboard components. ASUS shoulders the repair cost only if the damage is shipment/ transit-related. ⢠Keep the cap after installing the motherboard. ASUS will process Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) requests only if the motherboard comes with the cap on the LGA775 socket. ⢠The product warranty does not cover damage to the socket contacts resulting from incorrect CPU installation/removal, or misplacement/loss/incorrect removal of the PnP cap. P5MT-S CPU Socket 775 P5MT-S î
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 7 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135ú angle. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and foreï¬Ânger to a 100ú angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket. The socket alignment key should ï¬Ât into the CPU notch. A l i g n m e n t k e y G o l d t r i a n g l e m a r k L o a d p l a t e A B 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. R e t e n t i o n t a b L o a d l e v e r T h i s s i d e o f t h e s o c k e t b o x s h o u l d f a c e y o u . P n P c a p A B To prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU.
2 - 8 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n The CPU ï¬Âts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. A B The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with the Intel î Enhanced Memory 64 Technology (EM64T), Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST), and Hyper-Threading Technology. Refer to the Appendix for more information on these CPU features.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 9 F a s t e n e r M o t h e r b o a r d h o l e 2 . 3 . 2 I n s t a l l i n g t h e C P U h e a t s i n k a n d f a n The Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. To install the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four fasteners match the holes on the motherboard. N a r r o w e n d o f t h e g r o o v e ⢠When you buy a boxed Intel î Pentium î 4 processor, the package includes the CPU fan and heatsink assembly. ⢠Your Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 heatsink and fan assembly comes in a push-pin design and requires no tool to install. ⢠If you purchased a separate CPU heatsink and fan assembly, make sure that you have properly applied Thermal Interface Material to the CPU heatsink or CPU before you install the heatsink and fan assembly. ⢠Make sure that you use Intel î -certiï¬Âed multi-directional heatsink and fan only. ⢠Make sure that you have installed the motherboard to the chassis before you install the CPU fan and heatsink assembly. Make sure to orient each fastener with the narrow end of the groove pointing outward. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) Orient the heatsink and fan assembly such that the CPU fan cable is closest to the CPU fan connector.
2 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 3. Connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_FAN1/CPU_FAN2. 2. Push down two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to secure the heatsink and fan assembly in place. B B A A A B B A P5M T-S î C PU_FAN1 CPU_ FAN2 P 5MT -S CP U Fan Con nect ors G ND F ANPW R PWM CPU_ F AN2 C PU_ F AN1 GN D F AN PWR PW M R otatio n Rotation ⢠Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector. ⢠If there is only one CPU fan cable, connect it to the connector labeled CPU_FAN1. Failure to do so may cause hardware monitoring errors. Set the CPU fan pin selection jumper to use a 3-pin or 4-pin fan cable plug. Refer to âÂÂ2.6 Jumpersâ for deatails.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 1 1 2 . 3 . 3 U n i n s t a l l i n g t h e C P U h e a t s i n k a n d f a n To uninstall the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Disconnect the CPU fan cable from the connector on the motherboard. 2. Rotate each fastener counterclockwise. 3. Pull up two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to disengage the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard. B B A A A A B B 4. Carefully remove the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard.
2 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 5. Rotate each fastener clockwise to ensure correct orientation when reinstalling. The narrow end of the groove should point outward after resetting. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) N a r r o w e n d o f t h e g r o o v e Refer to the documentation in the boxed or stand-alone CPU fan package for detailed information on CPU fan installation.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 1 3 2.4 System memory 2 . 4 . 1 O v e r v i e w The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR2 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR DIMM but has a 240-pin footprint compared to the 184-pin DDR DIMM. DDR2 DIMMs are notched differently to prevent installation on a DDR DIMM socket. The ï¬Âgure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: 2 . 4 . 2 M e m o r y c o n f i g u r a t i o n s You may install 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, and 2 GB unbuffered ECC or non-ECC DDR2-533/667 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency. For optimum compatibility, we recommend that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor. Refer to the DDR2 Qualiï¬Âed Vendors List on the ASUS web site. ⢠When installing one or two DIMMs, install the DIMM(s) to the blue slots (DIMM_A2/DIMM_B2). ⢠Three DDR2 DIMMs intalled into any three memory sockets will function in single-channel mode. P5MT-S 240-pin DDR2 DIMM Sockets DIMM_A1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_A2 1 12 Pins 128 Pins P5MT-S î
2 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . 4 . 3 I n s t a l l i n g a D I M M Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. To install a DIMM: 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2 . 4 . 4 R e m o v i n g a D I M M Follow these steps to remove a DIMM. 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it ï¬Âts in only one direction. DO NOT force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. DO NOT install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Support the DIMM lightly with your ï¬Ângers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it ï¬Âips out with extra force. U n l o c k e d r e t a i n i n g c l i p D D R 2 D I M M n o t c h 1 2 3 D D R 2 D I M M n o t c h 1 2 1
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 1 5 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2 . 5 . 1 I n s t a l l i n g a n e x p a n s i o n c a r d To install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press ï¬Ârmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier. 6. Replace the system cover. 2 . 5 . 2 C o n f i g u r i n g a n e x p a n s i o n c a r d After installing the expansion card, conï¬Âgure it by adjusting the software settings. 1. Turn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any. See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage to the motherboard components. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âÂÂShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conï¬Âicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable. Refer to the table on the next page for details.
2 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . 5 . 3 I n t e r r u p t a s s i g n m e n t s I R Q P r i o r i t y S t a n d a r d F u n c t i o n 0 1 System Timer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 â Re-direct to IRQ#9 3* 11 Communications Port (COM2) 4* 12 Communications Port (COM1) 5* 13 IRQ holder for PCI steering 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7* 15 Printer Port (LPT1) 8 3 System CMOS/Real Time Clock 9* 4 IRQ holder for PCI steering 10* 5 IRQ holder for PCI steering 11* 6 IRQ holder for PCI steering 12* 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel 15 10 Secondary IDE Channel * These IRQs are usually available for ISA or PCI devices. D e s c r i p t i o n I N T A I N T B I N T C I N T D R E Q # G N T # PATA Controller PIRQA# â â â â â SATA Controller PIRQD# â â â â â SMBus Controller PIRQB# â â â â USB1 UHCI Controller #1 PIRQH# â â â â USB1 UHCI Controller #2 PIRQD# â â â â â USB 2.0 EHCI Controller PIRQH# â â â â â BMC5721 #1 PIRQA# â â â â â BMC5721 #2 PIRQB# â â â â â ATI RAGE XL PIRQD# â â â REQ1# GNT1# Adaptec 7901 PXIRQ2 â â â PXREQ2 PXGNT2 PCI Express Slot 1 (x16) PIRQA# â â â â â PCIX Slot 2 (64-bit) PXIRQ0 PXIRQ1 PXIRQ2 PXIRQ3 PXREQ0 PXGNT0 PCIX Slot 3 (64-bit) PXIRQ4 PXIRQ5 PXIRQ6 PXIRQ7 PXREQ1 PXGNT1 PCI Slot 4 (32-bit) PIRQE# PIRQF# PIRQG# PIRQH# REQ0# GNT0# S t a n d a r d i n t e r r u p t a s s i g n m e n t s P C I B u s N u m b e r , I D S E L , a n d I R Q a s s i g n m e n t s
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 1 7 2 . 5 . 5 P C I E x p r e s s x 1 6 s l o t This motherboard supports PCI Express x16 graphics cards that comply with the PCI Express speciï¬Âcations. The ï¬Âgure shows a graphics card installed on the PCI Express x16 slot. 2 . 5 . 4 P C I / P C I - X s l o t s The PCI and PCI-X slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI/PCI-X speciï¬Âcations. 3 2 - b i t P C I s l o t 6 4 - b i t P C I - X s l o t When installing an optional ZCR card, install the card on PCI_X2 slot that is colored green. A PCI Express graphics card may run only at x1 speed due to chipset limitation. PCI Express I/O cards may only run at x8 or x4 speed. 2 . 5 . 6 M i n i - P C I s o c k e t The mini-PCI socket on the motherboard supports an ASUS Server Management Board. M i n i - P C I s o c k e t
2 - 1 8 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2.6 Jumpers 1 . C l e a r R T C R A M ( C L R T C 1 ) This jumper allows you to clear the Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. You can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. To erase the RTC RAM: 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery. 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Re-install the battery. 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer. 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! P5MT-S Clear RTC RAM CLRTC1 Normal (Default) Clear CMOS 1 2 2 3 P5MT-S î
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 1 9 2 . C P U f a n p i n s e l e c t i o n ( 3 - p i n F M _ C P U 1 , F M _ C P U 2 ) These jumpers allow you to connect either a 3-pin or a 4-pin fan cable plug to the CPU fan connectors (CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2). Set these jumpers to pins 1-2 if you are using a 3-pin fan cable plug, or to pins 2-3 if you are using a 4-pin plug. 3 . U S B d e v i c e w a k e - u p ( 3 - p i n U S B P W 1 2 , U S B P W 3 4 ) Set these jumpers to 5V to wake up the computer from S1 sleep mode (CPU stopped, DRAM refreshed, system running in low power mode) using the connected USB devices. Set to 5VSB to wake up from S4 sleep mode (no power to CPU, DRAM in slow refresh, power supply in reduced power mode). ⢠The USB device wake-up feature requires a power supply that can provide 500mA on the 5VSB lead for each USB port; otherwise, the system would not power up. ⢠If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 4 to wake up the system from S4 sleep mode. ⢠The total current consumed must NOT exceed the power supply capability ( 5VSB) whether under normal condition or in sleep mode. P5MT-S USB Device Wake-U p USBPW12 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 3 1 2 USBPW34 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 1 3 2 P5MT-S î P5MT-S î P5MT-S FM CPU Setting FM_CPU2 FM_CPU1 1 2 2 3 3-pin fan 4-pin fan (Default) 2 3 2 1 3-pin fan 4-pin fan (Default)
2 - 2 0 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 4 . K e y b o a r d / M o u s e p o w e r ( 3 - p i n K B P W R 1 ) Thi s j ump er all ows yo u t o e nab le or dis abl e t he key boa rd/mouse wak e-u p f eat ure . S et thi s j ump er to pin s 2 -3 ( 5VSB ) to w ake up the co mpu ter wh en you pr ess a key on th e k eyb oar d ( the de fau lt is the Sp ace Ba r) or use the mouse. This f eature requi res an ATX pow er sup ply th at can su ppl y a t l eas t 1 A o n t he 5V SB lea d, and a cor res pon din g s ett ing in th e B IOS . 5 . V G A c o n t r o l l e r s e t t i n g ( 3 - p i n V G A _ E N 1 ) These jumpers allow you to enable or disable the onboard ATI î RAGE-XL PCI VGA controller. Set to pins 1-2 to activate the VGA feature. P5MT-S î P5MT-S Keyboard Power Setting KBPWR1 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 3 1 2 P5MT-S î P5MT-S VGA Setting VGA_EN1 Enable (Default) Disable 2 1 2 3
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 2 1 6 . G i g a b i t L A N c o n t r o l l e r s e t t i n g ( 3 - p i n L A N _ E N 1 , L A N _ E N 2 ) These jumpers allow you to enable or disable the onboard Broadcom î BCM5721 Gigabit LAN1 or LAN2 controller. Set to pins 1-2 to activate the Gigabit LAN controller. 7 . R A I D c o n t r o l l e r s e l e c t i o n ( 3 - p i n R A I D _ S E L 1 ) T h i s j u m p e r a l l o w s y o u t o s e l e c t t h e RA ID c on ï¬Âg ur at io n ut il it y to u se w he n y o u c r e a t e d i s k a r r a y s . P l a c e t h e j u m pe r ca ps o ve r pi ns 1 -2 i f yo u wa nt t o u s e t h e LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility (default); otherwise, place the jumper caps to pins 2-3 to use the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager. P5MT-S î P5MT-S LAN1 Controller Setting Enable (Default) Disable LAN_EN1 2 1 2 3 P5MT-S LAN2 Controller Setting Enable (Default) Disable LAN_EN2 2 1 2 3 P5MT-S î P5MT-S î RAID_SEL1 LSI RAID ROM (Default) INTEL RAID ROM 2 1 2 3 P5MT-S RAID Controller Selection
2 - 2 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 9 . F o r c e B I O S r e c o v e r y s e t t i n g ( 3 - p i n R E C O V E R Y 1 ) This jumper allows you to quickly update or recover the BIOS when it gets corrupted. To update the BIOS: 1. Prepare a ï¬Âoppy disk that contains the latest BIOS for the motherboard (xxxx-xxx.ROM) and the AFUDOS.EXE utility. 2. Set the jumper to pins 2-3. 3. Insert the ï¬Âoppy disk then turn on the system to update the BIOS. 4. Shut down the system. 5. Set the jumper back to pins 1-2. 6. Turn on the system. 2 3 1 2 P5MT-S SCSI Controller Setting SCSI_EN1 Enable (Default) Disable P5MT-S î P5MT-S î P5MT-S BIOS Recovery Setting RECOVERY1 (Default) Normal BIOS recovery 2 3 2 1 8 . S C S I c o n t r o l l e r s e t t i n g ( 3 - p i n S C S I _ E N 1 ) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard Adaptec AIC-7901X PCI-X U320 SCSI controller. Set to pins 1-2 to activate the SCSI feature, and support RAID conï¬Âgurations.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 2 3 2.7 Connectors 2 . 7 . 1 R e a r p a n e l c o n n e c t o r s A C T / L I N K L E D S P E E D L E D S t a t u s D e s c r i p t i o n S t a t u s D e s c r i p t i o n OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection GREEN Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection L A N p o r t L E D i n d i c a t i o n s L A N p o r t S P E E D L E D A C T / L I N K L E D 1 3 6 5 7 8 4 2 1. PS/2 mouse port (green). This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 2. Parallel port. This 25-pin port connects a parallel printer, a scanner, or other devices. 3. PS/2 keyboard port (purple). This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. 4. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 5. Serial (COM1) port. This 9-pin communication port is for pointing devices or other serial devices. 6. VGA port. This port is for a VGA monitor or other VGA-compatible devices. 7. Gigabit LAN1 (RJ-45) port. This ports allow Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 8. Gigabit LAN2 (RJ-45) port. This ports allow Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications.
2 - 2 4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . I C H 7 R P r i m a r y I D E c o n n e c t o r ( 4 0 - 1 p i n P R I _ I D E 1 ) Thi s c onn ect or is for an Ul tra DM A 1 00/66 signal cable . The Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable has three connectors: a blue connector for the primary IDE connector on the motherboard, a black connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE slave device (optical drive/hard disk drive), and a gray connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE master device (hard disk drive). If you install two hard disk drives, you must conï¬Âgure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly. Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector. This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE devices. 2 . 7 . 2 I n t e r n a l c o n n e c t o r s 1 . F l o p p y d i s k d r i v e c o n n e c t o r ( 3 4 - 1 p i n F L O P P Y 1 ) This connector is for the provided Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector, then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. P5MT-S Floppy Disk Drive Connector FLOPPY1 PIN 1 P5MT-S î P5MT-S IDE Connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE1 PI N 1 P5MT-S î
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 2 5 3 . S e r i a l A T A c o n n e c t o r s ( 7 - p i n S A T A 1 , S A T A 2 , S A T A 3 , S A T A 4 ) These connectors are for the Serial ATA signal cables for Serial ATA hard disk drives. If you installed Serial ATA hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and RAID 5 conï¬Âguration using the Intel î Matrix Storage Technology or RAID 0, RAID 1 and RAID 0 1 conï¬Âguration using the LSI MegaRAID î utility embedded in the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge. S e r i a l A T A h a r d d i s k d r i v e c o n n e c t i o n C o n n e c t o r S e t t i n g U s e SATA1/SATA2 Master Boot disk SATA3/SATA4 Slave Data disk Thes e conn ecto rs are set IDE mode by d efault . In IDE mo de, you can conn ect Se rial ATA b oot/ data ha rd dis k dr ives t o th ese con nector s. I f you intend to create a S erial A TA RAI D se t usin g th ese co nnec tors, s et the Conï¬Âgure SATA as item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section âÂÂ4.3.4 IDE Conï¬Âgurationâ for details. Important notes on Serial ATA ⢠Use only two Serial ATA RAID connectors for each RAID 0 or RAID 1 set. ⢠Wh en us ing the co nnec tor s i n ID E m od e, co nne ct the pr ima ry (b oo t) ha rd di sk dr ive to the SAT A1 or SA TA2 c onn ec tor . Ref er to t he t abl e be low f or th e re com men ded SATA hard disk drive connections. P5MT-S SA T A Connectors SA T A2 GN D RS A TA _TXP 2 RS A TA _TXN 2 GN D RS A TA _RXP 2 RS A TA _RXN 2 GN D SA T A1 GN D RS A TA _TXP 1 RS A TA _TXN 1 GN D RS A TA _RXP 1 RS A TA _RXN 1 GN D SA T A4 GN D RS A TA _TXP 4 RS A TA _TXN 4 GN D RS A TA _RXP 4 RS A TA _RXN 4 GN D SA T A3 GN D RS A TA _TXP 3 RS A TA _TXN 3 GN D RS A TA _RXP 3 RS A TA _RXN 3 GN D P5MT-S î
2 - 2 6 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 4 . H a r d d i s k a c t i v i t y L E D c o n n e c t o r ( 4 - p i n H D L E D 1 ) This connector supplies power to the hard disk activity LED. The read or write activities of any device connected to the SCSI connectors or the SATA connectors cause this LED to light up. 5 . U S B c o n n e c t o r ( 1 0 - 1 p i n U S B 3 4 ) This connector is for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. This USB connector complies with USB 2.0 speciï¬Âcation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. The USB port module is purchased separately. P5MT-S î P5MT-S SCSI/SA T A Card Activity LED Connector HDLED1 1 ADD_IN_CARD_ACT# NC ADD_IN_CARD_ACT# NC P5MT-S î USB 5V USB_P3- USB_P3 GND NC P5MT-S USB 2.0 Connector USB34 USB 5V USB_P2- USB_P2 GND
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 2 7 6 . U l t r a 3 2 0 S C S I c o n n e c t o r ( 6 8 - p i n S C S I A 1 ) This motherboard comes with the Adaptec AIC-7901X PCI-X U320 SCSI controller that supports one 68-Pin Ultra320 SCSI connector. The SCSI channel can support a maximum of 15 SCSI devices as speciï¬Âed by Ultra320 standards. SCSI Connection Notes This motherboard has a 68-Pin Ultra320 SCSI connector. The onboard SCSI chipset incorporates an advanced multimode I/O cell that supports both single-ended (SE), Ultra2, Ultra160, and Ultra320 devices. With Ultra320 devices, the SCSI bus platform performs at full Ultra320 speeds (up to 320MB/s) and extended cabling 12m (or 25m in a point-to-point conï¬Âguration). When an SE device is attached, the bus defaults to an SE speed and 1.5m cable length. Connect SCSI devices as speciï¬Âed. A SCSI channel should have only one type of SCSI standard (e.g. Ultra320, Ultra160, Ultra2, Ultra-Wide). Mixing SCSI devices on a single channel decreases performance of the slower devices. P5MT-S Onboard SCSI Connector 35 68 34 1 SCSIA1 68-Pin Ultra320/ Ultra2-Wide SCSI Connector P5MT-S î
2 - 2 8 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 7 . S e r i a l p o r t c o n n e c t o r ( 1 0 - 1 p i n C O M 2 ) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The serial port module is purchased separately. 8 . B M C c o n n e c t o r ( 1 6 - p i n B M C C O N N 1 ) This connector is for the ASUS server management card, if available. 9 . A m b i e n t t h e r m a l s e n s o r ( 2 - p i n T R P W R 1 ) If you want additional thermal monitoring, connect the thermal sensor cable with thermistor (of 1úK or at 25úC, B=3435) to this connector. P5MT-S î P5MT-S BMC Connector BMCCONN1 5VSB 5VSB BMC SMBCLK 12CCLK1 PSON# BMC_RST# PWROK PSONEN# 5VSB 5VSB BMC SMBDA TA 12CDA TA1 FP_PWRBTN# BMC_PRESENT# BMC_SMI# GND P5MT-S î P5MT-S TRPWR Connector TRPWR1 SYS-THEAMAL2 GND P5MT-S î P5MT-S Serial Port2 (COM2) Connector PIN 1 COM2
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 2 9 1 0 . C P U a n d s y s t e m f a n c o n n e c t o r s ( 3 - p i n C P U _ F A N 1 / 2 , R E A R _ F A N 1 / 2 , F R N T _ F A N 1 / 2 ) The fa n c onn ect ors su ppo rt coo lin g f ans of 35 0 mA ~ 740 mA (8.88 W max.) or a total of 2.1 A ~ 4.44 A (53.28 W max.) at 12V. Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector. Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufï¬Âcient air ï¬Âow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! 1 1 . B a c k p l a n e S M B u s c o n n e c t o r ( 6 - 1 p i n B P S M B 1 ) This connector allows you to connect SMBus (System Management Bus) devices. Devices communicate with an SMBus host and/or other SMBus devices using the SMBus interface. P5MT-S î P5MT-S Fan Connectors REAR_F AN2 REAR_F AN1 FRNT_F AN1 FRNT_F AN2 GND F ANPWR PWM CPU_F AN2 CPU_F AN1 GND F ANPWR PWM GND Rotation FANPWR CPU_FAN2 REAR_FAN2 REAR_FAN1 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 CPU_FAN1 GND Rotation FANPWR GND Rotation GND Rotation FANPWR Rotation Rotation FANPWR P5MT-S î P5MT-S SMBus Connector BPSMB1 1 I2C_CLK GND I2C_DA T A 5V F ANOUT
2 - 3 0 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 1 2 . P o w e r s u p p l y S M B u s c o n n e c t o r ( 5 - p i n P S U S M B 1 ) This connector is for the power supply SMB cable, if your power supply supports the SMBus function. 1 3 . S S I p o w e r c o n n e c t o r s ( 2 4 - p i n A T X P W R 1 , 8 - p i n A T X 1 2 V 2 ) T he s e c on n ec t or s a r e f or SS I p ow e r s up p ly pl u gs . T h e p ow e r s up p ly pl u gs a re de s ig n ed to ï¬Ât th es e c o nn e ct o rs in on l y o ne or i en t at i on . F i nd th e p r op e r o ri e nt a ti o n a nd pu s h do w n ﬠrm l y u nt i l t he co n ne c to r s c om p le t el y ﬠt . ⢠Use of an SSI 12 V Speciï¬Âcation 2.0-compliant power supply unit (PSU) that provides a minimum power of 450 W is recommended for a fully-conï¬Âgured system. ⢠By default, four ATX12V2 connector pins are covered to prevent incorrent insertion of a 4-pin ATX 12V power plug. Remove this cover when using a PSU with an 8-pin ATX 12V power plug. ⢠Do not forget to connect the 4-pin or 8-pin ATX 12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠We recommend that you use a P SU wi th a hig he r p ow er ou tput wh en co nï¬Âg ur ing a sys tem wi th m ore po we r c on sum in g de vic es. T he sy ste m ma y b ec ome u nsta ble or may no t b oo t u p if th e po wer is ina deq uat e. ⢠You must install a PSU with a higher power rating if you intend to install additional devices. P5MT-S î P5MT-S Power Supply SMBus Connector PSUSMB1 3.3V Remote Sense GND NC PSU_I2CDA TA PSU_I2CCLK P5MT-S A TX Power Connectors 24-pin Power Connector A TX12V2 A TXPWR1 3 Volts 3 Volts Ground 5 Volts 5 Volts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 Volts -5 Volts 5 Volts 3 Volts -12 Volts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 Volts 12 Volts 3 Volts 5 Volts 1 Ground GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC P5MT-S î
A S U S P 5 M T - S 2 - 3 1 1 4 . A u x i l i a r y p a n e l c o n n e c t o r ( 2 0 - p i n A U X _ P A N E L 1 ) This connector is for additional front panel features including front panel SMB, locator LED and switch, chassis intrusion, and LAN LEDs. ⢠Front panel SMB (6-1 pin FPSMB) These leads connect the front panel SMBus cable. ⢠LAN activity LED (2-pin LAN1_LED, LAN2_LED) These leads are for Gigabit LAN activity LEDs on the front panel. ⢠Chassis intrusion (2-pin CHASSIS) These leads are for the intrusion detection feature for chassis with intrusion sensor or microswitch. When you remove any chassis component, the sensor triggers and sends a high-level signal to these leads to record a chassis intrusion event. ⢠Locator LED (6-pin LOCATOR) The se lea ds are fo r t he loc ato r s wit ch and LE D o n t he fro nt pan el. P5MT-S î P5MT-S Auxiliary Panel Connector AUX_P ANEL1 I2C_4_DA TA# LOCA TORLED1 5VSB LOCA TORLED1- LAN1_LINKACTLED- LOCA TORBTN# LAN1_LINKACTLED GND 5VSB I2C_4_CLK# GND GND LAN2_LINKACTLED LOCA TORLED2- LAN2_LINKACTLED- LOCA TORLED2 CASEOPEN PIN1 NC
2 - 3 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 1 5 . S y s t e m p a n e l c o n n e c t o r ( 2 0 - p i n P A N E L 1 ) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector. The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power, and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Message LED (Brown 2-pin MLED) This connector is for the message LED cable that connects to the front message LED. The message LED indicates the booting status. The LED blinks when the system is in the boot process until the operating system is loaded. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector. The IDE LED lights up or ï¬Âashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker. The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠ATX power button/soft-off button (Light Green 2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF. ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power. The system panel connector is color-coded for easy connection. P5MT-S System Panel Connector P ANEL1 MLED- GND NC POWERBTN# 5V GND GND NC POWERLED HDLED GND HDLED- POWERLED- MLED NMIBTN# GND RESETBTN# SPKROUT GND P5MT-S î
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system.
A S U S P 5 M T - S Chapter summary 3 3.1 Starting up for the ï¬Ârst time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer ................................................... 3-2
A S U S P 5 M T - S 3 - 1 3.1 Starting up for the ï¬Ârst time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover. 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector. 5. Turn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power, the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems with ATX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the ATX power button. If your monitor complies with âÂÂgreenâ standards or if it has a âÂÂpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the Power-On Self-Test (POST). While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power, the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. 7. At power on, hold down the <Del> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4. A M I B I O S b e e p c o d e s B e e p D e s c r i p t i o n E r r o r One beep Keyboard controller error Refresh Time error No master drive detected Two continuous beeps followed by Floppy controller failure two short beeps Two continuous beeps followed by Hardware component failure four short beeps
3 - 2 C h a p t e r 3 : P o w e r i n g u p 3.2 Powering off the computer 3 . 2 . 1 U s i n g t h e O S s h u t d o w n f u n c t i o n If you are using Windows î Server 2000: 1. Click the Start button then click Shut Down... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. If you are using Windows î Server 2003: 1. Click the Start button then select Turn Off Computer. 2. Click the Turn Off button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down 3 . 2 . 2 U s i n g t h e d u a l f u n c t i o n p o w e r s w i t c h While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section âÂÂ4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4 for details
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
Chapter summary 4 A S U S P 5 M T - S 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program ............................................................ 4-10 4.3 Main menu ........................................................................... 4-13 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-18 4.5 Power Conï¬Âguration ........................................................... 4-27 4.6 Server menu ....................................................................... 4-32 4.7 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-34 4.8 Exit menu ............................................................................ 4-39
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk.) 2. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS ï¬Âle fails or gets corrupted.) 3. ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. 4 . 1 . 1 C r e a t i n g a b o o t a b l e f l o p p y d i s k To create a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk: DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB ï¬Âoppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS ï¬Âle to a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities.
4 - 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 1 . 2 A F U D O S u t i l i t y The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS ï¬Âle in DOS environment using a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk with the updated BIOS ï¬Âle. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS ï¬Âle that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. C o p y i n g t h e c u r r e n t B I O S To copy the current BIOS ï¬Âle using the AFUDOS utility: The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS ï¬Âle. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS ï¬Âle to the ï¬Âoppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AM I F irm war e U pda te Uti lit y - Ve rsi on 1.1 9(A SUS V2 .07 (03 .11 .24 BB) ) Cop yrig ht (C ) 20 02 Am eric an M ega tren ds , I nc. All r ight s res erve d. Reading ï¬Âash ..... done Write to ï¬Âle...... ok A:\> 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable ï¬Âoppy disk you created earlier. 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[ï¬Âlename] where the [ï¬Âlename] is any user-assigned ï¬Âlename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main ï¬Âlename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. ⢠Make sure that the ï¬Âoppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1024 KB free space to save the ï¬Âle. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only. The actual BIOS screen displays may not be same as shown. M a i n f i l e n a m e E x t e n s i o n n a m e A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 3 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable ï¬Âoppy disk you created earlier. 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[ï¬Âlename] where [ï¬Âlename] is the latest or the original BIOS ï¬Âle on the bootable ï¬Âoppy disk. U p d a t i n g t h e B I O S f i l e To update the BIOS ï¬Âle using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) and download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle for the motherboard. Save the BIOS ï¬Âle to a bootable ï¬Âoppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5MTS.rom Write the BIOS ï¬Âlename on a piece of paper. You need to type the exact BIOS ï¬Âlename at the DOS prompt. A:\>afudos /iP5MTS.ROM AM I F irm war e U pda te Uti lit y - Ve rsi on 1.1 9(A SUS V2 .07 (03 .11 .24 BB) ) Cop yrig ht (C ) 20 02 Am eric an M ega tren ds , I nc. All r ight s res erve d. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during ï¬Âash BIOS Reading ï¬Âle ....... done Reading ï¬Âash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing ï¬Âash ...... done Writing ï¬Âash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility veriï¬Âes the ï¬Âle and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure!
4 - 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5MTS.ROM AM I F irm war e U pda te Uti lit y - Ve rsi on 1.1 9(A SUS V2 .07 (03 .11 .24 BB) ) Cop yrig ht (C ) 20 02 Am eric an M ega tren ds , I nc. All r ight s res erve d. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during ï¬Âash BIOS Reading ï¬Âle ....... done Reading ï¬Âash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing ï¬Âash ...... done Writing ï¬Âash ...... done Verifying ï¬Âash .... done Please restart your computer A:\> U p d a t i n g t h e B I O S f i l e u s i n g a U S B f l a s h d r i v e If you have not purchased a USB ï¬Âoppy disk drive, you may update the BIOS ï¬Âle using a USB ï¬Âash drive. Format the USB ï¬Âash drive to FAT16 or 32 system ï¬Âle before updating the BIOS. To format the USB ï¬Âash drive to a FAT32/16 system ï¬Âle: 1. Insert the USB ï¬Âash drive to an available USB port. 2. From the Windows desktop, click Start, then select My computer. 3. Right-click the USB ï¬Âash drive icon, then select Format from the menu. 4. From the File system ï¬Âeld, select FAT32 or FAT16, then click the Start button. To update the BIOS ï¬Âle: 1. Copy the original or the latest BIOS ï¬Âle and the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) to the USB ï¬Âash drive. 2. Insert the USB ï¬Âash drive to an available USB port, then place the motherboard support CD to the optical drive. 3. Boot the system from the support CD, then select the FreeDOS command prompt. 4. At the DOS prompt, replace the prompt with the USB ï¬Âash disk drive letter, then type: afudos /i[ï¬Âlename] 5. Follow the instructions in the previous section to update the BIOS ï¬Âle.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 5 4 . 1 . 3 A S U S C r a s h F r e e B I O S 2 u t i l i t y The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS ï¬Âle when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. You can update a corrupted BIOS ï¬Âle using the motherboard support CD or the ï¬Âoppy disk that contains the updated BIOS ï¬Âle. R e c o v e r i n g t h e B I O S f r o m a f l o p p y d i s k To recover the BIOS from a ï¬Âoppy disk: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Insert the ï¬Âoppy disk with the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the ï¬Âoppy disk for the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... Floppy found! Reading ï¬Âle âÂÂP5MTS.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start ï¬Âashing... When found, the utility reads the BIOS ï¬Âle and starts ï¬Âashing the corrupted BIOS ï¬Âle. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! ⢠Prepare the motherboard support CD or the ï¬Âoppy disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility. ⢠Make sure that you rename the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle in the ï¬Âoppy disk to P5MTS.ROM.
4 - 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p R e c o v e r i n g t h e B I O S f r o m t h e s u p p o r t C D To recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Remove any ï¬Âoppy disk from the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then turn on the system. 2. Insert the support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the ï¬Âoppy disk for the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... Floppy not found! Checking for CD-ROM... CD-ROM found! Reading ï¬Âle âÂÂP5MTS.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start ï¬Âashing... When no ï¬Âoppy disk is found, the utility automatically checks the optical drive for the original or updated BIOS ï¬Âle. The utility then updates the corrupted BIOS ï¬Âle. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬Âoppy... DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure!
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 7 I n s t a l l i n g A S U S U p d a t e To install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 4 . 1 . 4 A S U S U p d a t e u t i l i t y The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS file ⢠Download the latest BIOS file from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS file ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. Quit all Microsoft î Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP).
4 - 8 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network trafï¬Âc, or click Auto Select. Click Next. U p d a t i n g t h e B I O S t h r o u g h t h e I n t e r n e t To update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate. The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 9 U p d a t i n g t h e B I O S t h r o u g h a B I O S f i l e To update the BIOS through a BIOS ï¬Âle: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate. The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a ï¬Âle option from the drop-down menu, then click Next. 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS ï¬Âle from the Open window, then click Save. 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
4 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable ï¬Ârmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section âÂÂ4.1 Managing and updating your BIOSâÂÂ. Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconï¬Âguring your system, or prompted to âÂÂRun SetupâÂÂ. This section explains how to conï¬Âgure your system using this utility. Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the conï¬Âguration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconï¬Âgure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the ï¬Ârmware hub. The ï¬Ârmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility. When you start up the computer, the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Delete> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST, restart the system by pressing <Ctrl> <Alt> <Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. You can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the ï¬Ârst two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability. Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit Menu. See section âÂÂ4.8 Exit Menu.â â¢ The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only, and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle for this motherboard.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 1 1 4 . 2 . 2 M e n u b a r The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conï¬Âguration Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the Advanced Power Management (APM) conï¬Âguration Server For changing the advanced server settings Boot For changing the system boot conï¬Âguration Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings To select an item on the menu bar, press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4 . 2 . 3 N a v i g a t i o n k e y s At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. 4 . 2 . 1 B I O S m e n u s c r e e n Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another. N a v i g a t i o n k e y s S u b - m e n u i t e m s System Overview System Date [Mon 05/30/2005] System Time [11:10:19] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] IDE Conï¬Âguration System Information G e n e r a l h e l p M e n u b a r C o n f i g u r a t i o n f i e l d s M e n u i t e m s Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. Use [ENTER]. [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit
4 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 2 . 4 M e n u i t e m s The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciï¬Âc items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power, Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4 . 2 . 5 S u b - m e n u i t e m s A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. To display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4 . 2 . 6 C o n f i g u r a t i o n f i e l d s These ï¬Âelds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user-conï¬Âgurable, you can change the value of the ï¬Âeld opposite the item. You cannot select an item that is not user-conï¬Âgurable. A conï¬Âgurable ï¬Âeld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. To change the value of a ï¬Âeld, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to âÂÂ4.2.7 Pop-up window.â 4 . 2 . 7 P o p - u p w i n d o w Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conï¬Âguration options for that item. 4 . 2 . 8 S c r o l l b a r A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not ï¬Ât on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> /<Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4 . 2 . 9 G e n e r a l h e l p At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. M a i n m e n u i t e m s Sy st em Da te [Mon 05/30/2005] System Time [11:10:19] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] IDE Conï¬Âguration System Information BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit APM Conï¬Âguration Power Management/APM [Enabled] Video Power Down Mode [Suspend] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend] Suspend Time Out(Minute) [Disabled] Throttle Slow Clock Ratio [50%] Power Button Function [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On by PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On by PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On Ring [Disabled] Power On PME# [Disabled] Power On RTC Alarm [Disabled] Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced S c r o l l b a r P o p - u p w i n d o w
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 1 3 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4 . 3 . 1 S y s t e m T i m e [ x x : x x : x x ] Allows you to set the system time. 4 . 3 . 2 S y s t e m D a t e [ D a y x x / x x / x x x x ] Allows you to set the system date. 4 . 3 . 3 L e g a c y D i s k e t t e A [ 1 . 4 4 M , 3 . 5 i n . ] Sets the type of ï¬Âoppy drive installed. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] Refer to section âÂÂ4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Mon 05/27/2005] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] IDE Conï¬Âguration System Information Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Use [ENTER]. [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬Âeld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬Âgure system time. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit
4 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p A T A / I D E C o n f i g u r a t i o n [ E n h a n c e d ] Allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the installed operating system (OS). Set to [Enhanced] if you are using native OS, e.g. Windows î 2000/XP. Set to [Compatible] if you are using legacy OS, e.g. Windows ME/98/NT, MS-DOS. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Compatible] [Enhanced] The items Conï¬Âgure SATA as and Third, Fourth IDE Master/Slave options appear only when you set the ATA/IDE Conï¬Âguration to [Enhanced]. 4 . 3 . 4 I D E C o n f i g u r a t i o n The items in this menu allow you to set or change the conï¬Âgurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you wish to conï¬Âgure the item. IDE Conï¬Âguration ATA/IDE Conï¬Âguration [Enhanced] Conï¬Âgure SATA as [IDE] Primary IDE Master : [Not Detected] Primary IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Third IDE Master : [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave : [Not Detected] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] Set [Compatible Mode] when Legacy OS (i.e. WIN ME, 98, NT4.0, MS DOS)is used. Set [Enhanced Mode] when Native OS (i.e. WIN2000, WIN XP) is used. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. Configure SATA As [IDE] Sets the conï¬Âguration for the Serial ATA connectors supported by the Southbridge chip. If you want to use the Serial ATA hard disk drives as Parallel ATA physical storage devices, set this item to [IDE]. Set this item to [RAID], if you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, or RAID 5 conï¬Âgurations using the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager or if you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 conï¬Âgurations using the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility. Set the item Conï¬Âgure SATA as to [RAID] if you want to use or conï¬Âgure the SATA connectors under SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9.0 SP1 operating system environment. Due to the OS limitation, you must set a SATA RAID to use any SATA device (at least two SATA devices are needed for the RAID conï¬Âguration). Refer to Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 for details on how to set a SATA RAID.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 1 5 The AHCI allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial ATA features that enhance storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. 4 . 3 . 5 P r i m a r y , T h i r d , F o u r t h I D E M a s t e r / S l a v e The BIOS automatically detects the connected IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item, then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. Primary IDE Master Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST32122A Size : 2.1GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : Supported Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled] Select the type of device connected to the system. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, Vendor, Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-conï¬Âgurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. If you want the Serial ATA hard disk drives to use the Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI), set this item to [AHCI]. For details on AHCI, go to: www.intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012304.htm www.intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012305.htm The SATA controller is set to Native mode when this item is set to [RAID] or [AHCI]. Legacy IDE Channels [SATA Pri, PATA Sec] Allows you to set Serial ATA, Parallel ATA, or both, to native mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [SATA Only] [PATA Pri, SATA Sec] [SATA Pri, PATA Sec] [PATA Only] I D E D e t e c t T i m e O u t ( S e c ) [ 3 5 ] Selects the time our value (in seconds) for detecting ATA/ATAPI devices. Conï¬Âguration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] The item Legacy IDE Channels appears only when you set the ATA/IDE Conï¬Âguration to [Compatible].
4 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p T y p e [ A u t o ] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are speciï¬Âcally conï¬Âguring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (ATAPI Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP, LS-120, or MO drive. Conï¬Âguration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] L B A / L a r g e M o d e [ A u t o ] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] B l o c k ( M u l t i - s e c t o r T r a n s f e r ) [ A u t o ] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] P I O M o d e [ A u t o ] Selects the PIO mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] D M A M o d e [ A u t o ] Selects the DMA mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] S M A R T M o n i t o r i n g [ A u t o ] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 3 2 B i t D a t a T r a n s f e r [ E n a b l e d ] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 1 7 4 . 3 . 6 S y s t e m I n f o r m a t i o n This menu gives you an overview of the general system speciï¬Âcations. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. A M I B I O S Displays the auto-detected BIOS information. P r o c e s s o r Displays the auto-detected CPU speciï¬Âcation. S y s t e m M e m o r y Displays the auto-detected total system memory. AMIBIOS Version : 08.00.11 Build Date : 12/01/05 Processor Type : Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Speed : 3200 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Total : 1024MB Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main
4 - 1 8 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. Take caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect ï¬Âeld values can cause the system to malfunction. MPS Conï¬Âguration CPU Conï¬Âguration Chipset Onboard Devices Conï¬Âguration PCIPnP Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Conï¬Âgure the Multi- Processor Table. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Select MPS Revision. MPS Conï¬Âguration MPS Revision [1.4] 4 . 4 . 1 M P S C o n f i g u r a t i o n M P S R e v i s i o n [ 1 . 4 ] Allows you to select the multi-processor system version. Conï¬Âguration options: [1.1] [1.4]
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 1 9 4 . 4 . 2 C P U C o n f i g u r a t i o n The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. NOTE: If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conï¬Âgure Advanced CPU settings Module Version: 3C.0B Manufacturer: Intel Brand String: Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Frequency : 3.40 GHz FSB Speed : 800 MHz Cache L1 : 16 KB Cache L2 : 1024 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked (Max:17, Min:14) Ratio Actual Value: 17 Ratio CMOS Setting [ 16] Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Hyper Threading Technology [Enabled] You can only adjust the Ratio CMOS Setting if you installed an unlocked CPU. Refer to the CPU documentation for details. R a t i o C M O S S e t t i n g [ 1 6 ] Sets the ratio between the CPU Core Clock and the Front Side Bus frequency. The default value of this item is auto-detected by the BIOS. Use the < > or <-> keys to adjust the values. Conï¬Âguration options: [8]...[28] M a x C P U I D V a l u e L i m i t [ D i s a b l e d ] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] H y p e r - T h r e a d i n g T e c h n o l o g y [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper-Threading Technology. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Hyper-Threading Technology item appears only when you installed an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Hyper-Threading Technology. Hyper-Threading is not supported when you installed a dual-core CPU.
4 - 2 0 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p C 1 E S u p p o r t [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], BIOS automatically checks the CPU capability to enable C1E support. In C1E mode, the CPU has lower power consumption when idle. Conï¬Âguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] S i n g l e L o g i c a l P r o c e s s o r M o d e [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the single logical processor mode for dual- core CPUs. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] I n t e l ( R ) S p e e d S t e p T e c h n o l o g y [ A u t o m a t i c ] Allows you to use the Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology. When set to [Automatic], you can adjust the system power settings in the operating system to use the EIST feature. Se t t his it em to [Di sab led ] if you do not want to use the EIST. Conï¬Âguration options: [Automatic] [Disabled] The following items appear only when you installed an Intel î Pentium î 4 dual-core CPU. ⢠Refer to the Appendix for details on how to use the EIST feature. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS ï¬Âle that supports EIST.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 2 1 O n b o a r d L A N B o o t R O M [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard LAN controller. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] O n b o a r d S C S I B o o t R O M [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard SCSI controller. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4 . 4 . 3 C h i p s e t C o n f i g u r a t i o n The Chipset Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Conï¬Âgure North Bridge feature Advanced Chipset Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. North Bridge Conï¬Âguration South Bridge Conï¬Âguration Intel PCI-X Hub Conï¬Âguration Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Enabled] Onboard SCSI Boot ROM [Enabled]
4 - 2 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p N o r t h B r i d g e C o n f i g u r a t i o n The NorthBridge Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the Northbridge related settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced ENABLE: Allow remapping of overlapped PCI memory above the total physical memory. DISABLE: Do not allow remapping of memory. North Bridge Chipset Conï¬Âguration Memory Remap Feature [Enabled] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Conï¬Âgure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Boots Graphics Adapter Priority[PEG/PCI] PEG Port Conï¬Âguration PEG Port [Auto] M e m o r y R e m a p F e a t u r e [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to remap the overlap PCI memory over the total physical memory. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] D R A M F r e q u e n c y [ A u t o ] Allows you to set the DDR operating frequency. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [533 MHz] [667 MHz] C o n f i g u r e D R A M T i m i n g b y S P D [ E n a b l e d ] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. The following sub-items appear when this item is disabled. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM CAS# Latency [5] Controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Conï¬Âguration options: [5] [4] [3] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [6 DRAM Clocks] Controls the latency between the DDR SDRAM active command and the read/write command. Conï¬Âguration options: [2 DRAM Clocks] [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks] [5 DRAM Clocks] [6 DRAM Clocks] Disable this item if you are using RedHat Linux Advanced Server 3.0 UP5/UP6 operating system.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 2 3 S o u t h B r i d g e C o n f i g u r a t i o n The SouthBridge Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the Southbridge related settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced To select number of UHCI USB Ports (USB 1.1) to be enabled. South Bridge Chipset Conï¬Âguration USB Functions [4 USB Ports] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] PCIE Ports Conï¬Âguration PCI Express Port 0 [Auto] PCI Express Port 4 [Auto] PCI Express Port 5 [Auto] U S B F u n c t i o n [ 4 U S B P o r t s ] Allows you to enable a speciï¬Âc number of USB ports, or disable the USB function. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [2 USB Ports] [4 USB Ports] U S B 2 . 0 C o n t r o l l e r [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller. Conï¬Âguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] DRAM RAS# Precharge [6 DRAM Clocks] Controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DDR SDRAM. Conï¬Âguration options: [2 DRAM Clocks] [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks] [5 DRAM Clocks] [6 DRAM Clocks] DRAM RAS# Activate to Precharge Delay [15 DRAM Clocks] Conï¬Âguration options: [4 DRAM Clocks] [5 DRAM Clocks] ~ [15 DRAM Clocks] B o o t G r a p h i c A d a p t e r P r i o r i t y [ P E G / P C I ] Allows selection of the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. Conï¬Âguration options: [PEG/PCI] [PCI/PEG] P E G P o r t C o n f i g u r a t i o n PEG Port [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Graphic port. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled]
4 - 2 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p P C I E P o r t C o n f i g u r a t i o n PCI Express Port 0 [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Port 0. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] PCI Express Port 4 [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Port 4. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] PCI Express Port 5 [Auto] Allows you to set or disable the PCI Express Port 5. Conï¬Âguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] I n t e l P C I - X H u b C o n f i g u r a t i o n The Intel PCI-X Hub Conï¬Âguration menu allows you to change the Intel PCI Express controller related settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Select the decode range for IO. Conï¬Âgure advanced settings for PCI-X Hub I/O Port Decode [4K Decode] VGA 16-Bit Decode [Enabled] I / O P o r t D e c o d e [ 4 K D e c o d e ] Allows you to set the decode range for the I/O controller. Conï¬Âguration options: [4K Decode] [1K Decode] V G A 1 6 - B i t D e c o d e [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the decode for the VGA controller. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 2 5 4 . 4 . 4 O n b o a r d D e v i c e s C o n f i g u r a t i o n Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Allows BIOS to Enable or Disable Floppy Controller. Conï¬Âgure W83627EHG-A Super IO Chipset Onboard Floppy Controller [Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3FB/IRQ4] Serial Port2 Address [2FB/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Mode [Normal] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Mode [Normal] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] O n b o a r d F l o p p y C o n t r o l l e r [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable the onboard ï¬Âoppy disk drive controller. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] S e r i a l P o r t 1 A d d r e s s [ 3 F 8 / I R Q 4 ] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] S e r i a l P o r t 2 A d d r e s s [ 2 F 8 / I R Q 3 ] Allows you to select the Serial Port2 base address. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Mode [Normal] Allows you to select the Serial Port2 mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Normal] [IrDA] [ASK IR] P a r a l l e l P o r t A d d r e s s [ 3 7 8 ] Allows you to select the Parallel Port base addresses. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [378] [278] [3BC] P a r a l l e l P o r t M o d e [ N o r m a l ] Allows you to select the Parallel Port mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Normal] [Bi-directional] [ECP] [EPP] [ECP & EPP] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Conï¬Âguration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ7]
4 - 2 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 4 . 5 P C I P n P The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. Take caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect ï¬Âeld values can cause the system to malfunction. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] NO : L ets th e B IOS co nï¬Âg ue all th e de vic es in the sy ste m. YE S: Let s t he op era tin g s yst em co nï¬Âg ure Pl ug and Pl ay (P nP) de vic es not re qui red fo r b oot if yo ur sys tem ha s a Pl ug an d P lay op era tin g sy ste m. P l u g A n d P l a y O / S [ N o ] When set to [No], BIOS conï¬Âgures all the devices in the system. When set to [Yes] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system conï¬Âgures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. Conï¬Âguration options: [No] [Yes] P C I L a t e n c y T i m e r [ 6 4 ] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register. Conï¬Âguration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] A l l o c a t e I R Q t o P C I V G A [ Y e s ] When set to [Yes], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Conï¬Âguration options: [No] [Yes] P a l e t t e S n o o p i n g [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], the pallete snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] I R Q - x x a s s i g n e d t o [ P C I D e v i c e ] When set to [PCI Device], the speciï¬Âc IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Conï¬Âguration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved]
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 2 7 4 . 5 P o w e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n The Power Conï¬Âguration menu items allow you to change the settings for the ACPI and Advanced Power Management (APM) features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬Âguration options. A C P I A P I C S u p p o r t [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Conï¬Âguration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conï¬Âguration Hardware Monitor Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Include ACPI APIC table pointer to RSDT pointer list. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Sever Boot Exit Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power Enable or disable APM. APM Conï¬Âguration Power Management/APM [Enabled] Video Power Down Mode [Suspend] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend] Standby Time Out [Disabled] Suspend Time Out [Disabled] Throttle Slow Clock Ratio [50%] System Thermal [Disabled] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Last State] Resume On Ring [Disabled] Resume On LAN [Disabled] Resume On By PME# [Disabled] Resume On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] P o w e r M a n a g e m e n t [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the motherboard Advance Power Management (APM) feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] 4 . 5 . 1 A P M C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 2 8 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p V i d e o P o w e r D o w n M o d e [ S u s p e n d ] Allows you to select the video power down mode Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Standby] [Suspend] H a r d D i s k P o w e r D o w n M o d e [ S u s p e n d ] Allows you to select the hard disk power down mode Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Standby] [Suspend] S t a n d b y T i m e O u t [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to select the speciï¬Âed time at which the system goes on standy mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [1 Min] [2 Min] [4 Min] [8 Min] [10 Min] [20 Min] [30 Min] [40 Min] [50 Min] [60 Min] S u s p e n d T i m e O u t [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to select the speciï¬Âed time at which the system goes on suspend mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [1 Min] [2 Min] [4 Min] [8 Min] [10 Min] [20 Min] [30 Min] [40 Min] [50 Min] [60 Min] T h r o t t l e S l o w C l o c k R a t i o [ 5 0 % ] Allows you to select duty cycle in throttle mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [87.5%] [75.0%] [62.5%] [50.0%] [37.5%] [25.0%] [12.5%] S y s t e m T h e r m a l [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the system thermal control feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] T h e r m a l A c t i v e T e m p e r a t u r e [ 6 0 ú C / 1 4 0 ú F ] Allows you to specify the system thermal control activating temperature. Conï¬Âguration options: [40úC/104úF] [45úC/113úF] [50úC/122úF] [55úC/131úF] [60úC/140úF] [65úC/149úF] [70úC/158úF] [75úC/167úF] T h e r m a l S l o w C l o c k R a t i o [ 5 0 % ] Allows you to select the duty cycle in the throttle when a thermal override condition occurs. Conï¬Âguration options: [87.5%] [75.0%] [62.5%] [50%] [37.5%] [25%] [12.5%] P o w e r B u t t o n F u n c t i o n [ O n / O f f ] Allows the system to go into On/Off mode or suspend mode when the power button is pressed. Conï¬Âguration options: [On/Off] [Suspend] The Thermal Active Temperature and Thermal Slow Clock Ratio items appear only when the System Thermal item is set to Enabled.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 2 9 R e s t o r e o n A C P o w e r L o s s [ L a s t S t a t e ] When set to Power Off, the system goes into off state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Conï¬Âguration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] R e s u m e O n R i n g [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], the system enables the RI to generate a wake event while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] R e s u m e O n L A N [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], the system enables the LAN to generate a wake event while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] R e s u m e O n B y P M E # [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], the system enables the PME to generate a wake event while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] R e s u m e O n B y R T C A l a r m [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to [Enabled], the items RTC Alarm Date, RTC Alarm Hour, RTC Alarm Minute, and RTC Alarm Second appear with set values. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following items appear only when the Resume On By RTC Alarm item is set to Enabled. RTC Alarm Date (Days) [15] To set the alarm date, highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection. Conï¬Âguration options: [Everyday] [1] [2] [3]...[31] System Time [12:30:30] To set the alarm time, highlight this item and press the < > or <-> key to make the selection.
4 - 3 0 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p P o w e r O n B y P S / 2 K e y b o a r d [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to use speciï¬Âc keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] P o w e r O n B y P S / 2 M o u s e [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4 . 5 . 2 H a r d w a r e M o n i t o r Hardware Monitor CPU1 Temperature [49úC/120úF] MB Temperature [47úC/114úF] CPU Fan1 Speed [3884RPM] CPU Fan2 Speed [N/A] Front Fan1 Speed [N/A] Front Fan2 Speed [N/A] Rear Fan1 Speed [N/A] Rear Fan2 Speed [N/A] Smart Fan Control [Smart Fan II] CPU1 Temperature [061] MB Temperature [050] VCORE1 Voltage [ 1.320V] VCORE2 Voltage [ 1.258V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.345V] 5V Voltage [ 5.094V] Use the arrow down key to display additional items. 5VSB Voltage [ 4.980V] VBAT Voltage [ 3.120V] 12V Voltage [12.053V] C P U 1 T e m p e r a t u r e [ x x x ú C / x x x ú F ] M B T e m p e r a t u r e [ x x x ú C / x x x ú F ] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Ignored] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU1 Temperature
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 3 1 C P U F a n 1 / 2 S p e e d [ x x x x R P M ] o r [ N / A ] F r o n t F a n 1 / 2 S p e e d [ x x x x R P M ] o r [ N / A ] R e a r F a n 1 / 2 S p e e d [ x x x x R P M ] o r [ N / A ] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU, front, and rear fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the ï¬Âeld shows N/A. S m a r t F a n C o n t r o l [ S m a r t F a n I I ] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Smart Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efï¬Âcient system operation. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Smart Fan] [Smart Fan II] The CPU1 T empe rature and MB Temper atur e items appea r wh en you set the Smart Fan Control item t o [Sma rt F an] or [Sm art Fan II]. C P U 1 T e m p e r a t u r e [ X X X ] M B T e m p e r a t u r e [ X X X ] Displays the detected CPU and system threshold temperature when the Smart Fan Control is enabled. V C O R E 1 V o l t a g e , V C O R E 2 V o l t a g e , 3 . 3 V V o l t a g e , 5 V V o l t a g e , 5 V S B V o l t a g e , V B A T V o l t a g e , 1 2 V V o l t a g e The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage outputs through the onboard voltage regulators.
4 - 3 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p R e m o t e A c c e s s [ E n a b l e d ] Enables or disables the remote access feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Server Select Remote Access type. Conï¬Âgure Remote Access type and parameters Remote Access [Enabled] Serial port number [COM1] Baudrate [19200] Flow Control [None] Redirection After BIOS POST [Always] Terminal Type [ANSI] VT-UTFB Combo Key Support [Disabled] Meida Type [Serial] The following items appear only when the Remote Access item is set to [Enabled]. 4.6 Server menu The Server menu items allow you to customize the server features. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Sever Boot Exit Conï¬Âgure Remote Access. Server Features Remote Access Conï¬Âguration R e m o t e A c c e s s C o n f i g u r a t i o n The items in this menu allows you to conï¬Âgure the Remote Access features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬Âguration options.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 3 3 S e r i a l p o r t n u m b e r [ C O M 1 ] Allows you to select serial port for console redirection. Conï¬Âguration options: [COM1] [COM2] B a u d r a t e [ 1 9 2 0 0 ] Selects the Baudrate for the Serial port. Conï¬Âguration options: [115200] [57600] [38400] [19200] [9600] F l o w C o n t r o l [ N o n e ] Allows you to select the ï¬Âow control for console redirection. Conï¬Âguration options: [None] [Hardware] [Software] R e d i r e c t i o n A f t e r B I O S P O S T [ A l w a y s ] Sets the redirection mode after the BIOS Power-On Self-Test (POST). Some operating systems may not work when this item is set to Always. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Boot Loader] [Always] T e r m i n a l T y p e [ A N S I ] Allows you to select the target terminal type. Conï¬Âguration options: [ANSI] [VT100] [VT-UTF8] V T - U T F 8 C o m b o K e y S u p p o r t [ D i s a b l e d ] Enables or disables the VT-UTF8 combo key support for ANSI or VT100 terminals. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] M e d i a T y p e [ S e r i a l ] Selects the media for console redirection. Conï¬Âguration options: [Serial] [LAN] [Serial LAN]
4 - 3 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4.7 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Boot Settings Boot Priority Boot Settings Conï¬Âguration Security Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Speciï¬Âes the Boot Device Priority sequence. A virtual ï¬Âoppy disk drive (Floppy Drive B:) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the ï¬Ârst boot device. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Server Boot Exit 4 . 7 . 1 B o o t D e v i c e P r i o r i t y Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Speciï¬Âes the boot sequence from the available devices. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding menu. Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY Drive] 2nd Boot Device [Network: MBA v7.7.5] 3rd Boot Device [Network: MBA v7.7.5] 1 s t B o o t D e v i c e [ 1 s t F L O P P Y D r i v e ] 2 n d B o o t D e v i c e [ N e t w o r k : M B A v 7 . 7 . 5 ] 3 r d B o o t D e v i c e [ N e t w o r k : M B A v 7 . 7 . 5 ] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. Conï¬Âguration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled]
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 3 5 4 . 7 . 2 B o o t S e t t i n g s C o n f i g u r a t i o n Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system. Boot Settings Conï¬Âguration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Enabled] Q u i c k B o o t [ E n a b l e d ] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] F u l l S c r e e n L o g o [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. B o o t u p N u m - L o c k [ O n ] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Conï¬Âguration options: [Off] [On] P S / 2 M o u s e S u p p o r t [ A u t o ] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] W a i t f o r û F 1 ü I f E r r o r [ E n a b l e d ] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] H i t û D E L ü M e s s a g e D i s p l a y [ E n a b l e d ] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âÂÂPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] I n t e r r u p t 1 9 C a p t u r e [ E n a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Conï¬Âguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4 - 3 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 7 . 3 S e c u r i t y The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬Âguration options. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Password C h a n g e S u p e r v i s o r P a s s w o r d Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. To set a Supervisor Password: 1. Sel ect t he C hange Superv isor P asswor d item , t hen pr ess <E nter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conï¬Ârm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. To change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear clear it by erasing the CMOS Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM. See section âÂÂ2.6 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. To cl ear th e s upe rvi sor pa ssw ord , s ele ct the Ch ang e S upe rvi sor Pa ssw ord th en pr ess <E nte r>. Th e m ess age âÂÂP ass wor d U nin sta lle dâ app ear s.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 3 7 After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.58 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] U s e r A c c e s s L e v e l [ F u l l A c c e s s ] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Conï¬Âguration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility. View Only allows access but does not allow change to any ï¬Âeld. Limited allows changes only to selected ï¬Âelds, such as Date and Time. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the ï¬Âelds in the Setup utility. C h a n g e U s e r P a s s w o r d Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. To set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conï¬Ârm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully. To change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password.
4 - 3 8 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p C l e a r U s e r P a s s w o r d Select this item to clear the user password. P a s s w o r d C h e c k [ S e t u p ] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility. When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Conï¬Âguration options: [Setup] [Always]
A S U S P 5 M T - S 4 - 3 9 4.8 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Sever Boot Exit Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults If you made changes to any of the settings in the menus, pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. A conï¬Ârmation window appears and prompts you to either save your changes or cancel the command. Select one of the options from this menu to exit. E x i t & S a v e C h a n g e s Select this option then press <Enter>, or simply press <F10>, to save your changes to CMOS before exiting the Setup utility. When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to save your changes and exit Setup. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu. E x i t & D i s c a r d C h a n g e s Select this option then press <Enter> to exit the Setup utility without saving your changes. When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to discard your changes and exit Setup. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu. D i s c a r d C h a n g e s Select this option then press <Enter> to discard the changes that you made, and restore the previously saved settings. When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to discard the changes, and load the previously saved settings. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu.
4 - 4 0 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p L o a d S e t u p D e f a u l t s Select this option then press <Enter> to load the optimized settings for each of the Setup menu items. When a conï¬Ârmation window appears, select [OK] then press <Enter> to load the default settings. If you wish to cancel the command, select [Cancel] then press <Enter> to return to the Exit menu.
5 RAID conï¬Âguration This chapter provides instructions for setting up, creating, and conï¬Âguring RAID sets using the available utilities.
A S U S P 5 M T - S Chapter summary 5 5.1 Setting up RAID .................................................................... 5-1 5.2 LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility ...................... 5-4 5.3 Global Array Manager .......................................................... 5-30 5.4 Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility .......................................... 5-31
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 1 5.1 Setting up RAID The motherboard comes with the following RAID solutions: ⢠LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID technology embedded in the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge supports up to four SATA hard disk drives and RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 0 1 configurations. ⢠Adaptec î AIC-7901X PCI-X SCSI controller supports SCSI hard disk drives and RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 configurations. 5 . 1 . 1 R A I D d e f i n i t i o n s RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. Two hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RA ID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conï¬Âguration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 0 1 is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 0 1 conï¬Âguration you get all the beneï¬Âts of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 conï¬Âgurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. JBOD (Spanning) stands for Just a Bunch of Disks and refers to hard disk drives that are not yet conï¬Âgured as a RAID set. This conï¬Âguration stores the same data redundantly on multiple disks that appear as a single disk on the operating system. Spanning does not deliver any advantage over using separate disks independently and does not provide fault tolerance or other RAID performance beneï¬Âts. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy ï¬Ârst the RAID driver from the support CD to a ï¬Âoppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to Chapter 6 for details.
5 - 2 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 1 . 2 I n s t a l l i n g h a r d d i s k d r i v e s The motherboard supports Serial ATA and SCSI hard disk drives for RAID set conï¬Âguration. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array. To install the SATA hard disks for RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. Install the SATA hard disks into the drive bays following the instructions in the system user guide. 2. Connect a SATA signal cable to the signal connector at the back of each drive and to the SATA connector on the motherboard. 3. Connect a SATA power cable to the power connector on each drive. To install the SCSI hard disks for RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. Install the SCSI hard disks into the drive bays following the instructions in the system user guide. 2. Connect the SCSI interface cable connectors at the back of the SCSI drives. 3. Connect the other end of the SCSI interface cable to the SCSI connector on the motherboard. 5 . 1 . 3 S e t t i n g t h e R A I D i t e m i n B I O S You must set the RAID item in the BIOS Setup before you can create a RAID set from SATA hard disk drives attached to the SATA connectors supported by the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge chip. To do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST. 2. Go to the Main Menu, select IDE Conï¬Âguration, then press <Enter>. 3. Set the ATA/IDE Conï¬Âguration item to [Enhanced], then press <Enter>. 4. Set the Conï¬Âgure SATA As item to [RAID]. 5. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to Chapter 4 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 3 5 . 1 . 4 R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n u t i l i t i e s Depending on the RAID connectors that you use, you can create a RAID set using the utilities embedded in each RAID controller. For example, use the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility if you installed SATA hard disk drives on the SATA connectors supported by the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge and/or the Adaptec SCSISelect (TM) Utility if you installed SCSI hard disk drives to the SCSI connector(s) supported by the Adaptec î AIC-7901X PCI-X SCSI controller. Refer to the succeeding sections for details on how to use each RAID conï¬Âguration utility.
5 - 4 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 3. When the utility main window appears, use the arrow keys to select an option from the Management Menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the Management Menu descriptions on the next page. At the bottom of the screen is the legend box. The keys on the legend box allow you to navigate through the setup menu options or execute commands. The keys on the legend box vary according to the menu level. 5.2 LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility Th e L SI Log ic Emb edd ed SAT A R AID Se tup Ut ili ty all ows yo u t o c rea te RAI D 0 , RA ID 1, or RAI D 1 0 s et( s) fro m S ATA ha rd dis k d riv es con nec ted t o the SA TA co nne cto rs sup por ted by th e m oth erb oar d I CH7R Southbridge chip. To enter the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility: 1. Turn on the system after installing all the SATA hard disk drives. 2. During POST, the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility automatically detects the installed SATA hard disk drives and displays any existing RAID set(s). Press <Ctrl> <M> to enter the utility. The LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID auto conï¬Âgures to RAID 1 when the SATA to RAID Mode is enabled.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 5 M e n u D e s c r i p t i o n Conï¬Âgure Allows you to create RAID 0 or RAID 1 set using the Easy Conï¬Âguration or the New Conï¬Âguration command. This menu also allows you to view, add, or clear RAID conï¬Âgurations or select the boot drive Initialize Allows you to initialize the logical drives of a created RAID set Objects Allows you to initialize logical drives or change the logical drive parameters Rebuild Allows you to rebuild failed drives Check Consistency Allows you to check the data consistency of the logical drives of a created RAID set 5 . 2 . 1 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 0 o r R A I D 1 s e t The LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility allows you to create a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set using two types of conï¬Âgurations: Easy and New. In Easy Conï¬Âguration, the logical drive parameters are set automatically including the size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). In New Conï¬Âguration, you manually set the logical drive parameters and assign the set size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). U s i n g E a s y C o n f i g u r a t i o n To create a RAID set using the Easy Conï¬Âguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conï¬Âgure, then press <Enter>. 2. Us e the ar row ke ys to sel ect Easy Conï¬Âguration, the n p res s < Ent er> .
5 - 6 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬Âgurable array appears on screen. 3. The ARRAY SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SATA ports. Select the drives you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y], where X is the array number, and Y is the drive number. The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 7 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬Âgurable array, then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
5 - 8 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 6. Select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 7. Select the RAID level from the menu, then press <Enter>. Yo u n ee d a t leas t t wo iden tic al ha rd di sk dr ive s when cr eat ing a R AID 1 se t. 8. When creating a RAID 1 set, select Stripe Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. When creating a RAID 0 set, proceed to step 10. 9. Key-in the stripe size, then press <Enter>. For server sys tems, we r ecommen d that you use a low er arr ay b lock si ze. For multim edia compu ter systems used main ly for aud io and vid eo edit ing, we r ecomme nd a higher array blo ck siz e fo r opti mum perform ance.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 9 10. When ï¬Ânished setting the selected logical drive conﬠguration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 12. Follow steps 5 to 10 to conﬠgure additional logical drives. 13. When prompted, save the conﬠguration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu.
5 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n U s i n g N e w C o n f i g u r a t i o n 3. Follow steps 3 to 7 of the previous section. 4. Select Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 5. Key in the desired logical drive size, then press <Enter>. 6. Follow steps 8 to 12 of the previous section to create the RAID set. When a RAI D se t is a lrea dy exis ting, usin g the N ew C onï¬Âgur atio n comm and er ases the e xist ing RAI D conﬠgura tion d ata. If you do no t wa nt to d elete the existi ng R AID set , use the View /Add C onï¬Âg uratio n co mma nd to v iew or cre ate an othe r RAID conï¬Âgu rati on. To create a RAID set using the New Conï¬Âguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conï¬Âgure, then press <Enter>. 2. Use the arrow keys to select New Conï¬Âguration, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 1 1 5 . 2 . 2 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 1 0 s e t You can create a RAID 10 set using four identical hard disk drives. To create a RAID 10 set using the Easy Conï¬Âguration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conï¬Âgure, then press <Enter>. 2. Us e the ar row ke ys to sel ect Easy Conï¬Âguration, the n p res s < Ent er> . 3. The ARRAY SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SATA ports. Select the drive(s) you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y], where X is the array number, and Y is the drive number. The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
5 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬Âgurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬Âgurable array, then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 1 3 6. Select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 7. Select RAID 10 from the menu, then press <Enter>. Yo u ne ed at l ea st f ou r id en tic al h ar d d is k dr iv es w he n cre at in g a R AI D 10 s et . 8. Select Stripe Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 9. Key-in the stripe size, then press <Enter>. For server sys tems, we r ecommen d that you use a low er arr ay b lock si ze. For multim edia compu ter systems used main ly for aud io and vid eo edit ing, we r ecomme nd a higher array blo ck siz e fo r opti mum perform ance.
5 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 10. When ï¬Ânished setting the selected logical drive conﬠguration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 11. When prompted, save the conﬠguration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 1 5 5 . 2 . 3 A d d i n g o r v i e w i n g a R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n You can add a new RAID conï¬Âguration or view an existing conï¬Âguration using the View/Add Conï¬Âguration command. A d d i n g a n e w R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n To add a new RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. Fro m the Ma nag eme nt Men u, hig hli ght Con ï¬Âgu re, th en pre ss <En ter >. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Vie w/Add Conï¬Âgu ration , then press <Enter>. 3. The ARR AY SEL ECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SATA ports. Select the drive(s) you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READ Y to ONLIN A[X]-[ Y], where X is the array number, and Y is the drive number. The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
5 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬Âgurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬Âgurable array, then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 1 7 6. Follow steps 6 to 7 of the Creating a RAID set: Using Easy Conï¬Âguration section. 7. Select Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 8. Key-in the desired logical drive size, then press <Enter>. 9. Follow steps 8 to 13 of the Creating a RAID set: Using Easy Conï¬Âguration section to add the new RAID conï¬Âguration.
5 - 1 8 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 2 . 4 I n i t i a l i z i n g t h e l o g i c a l d r i v e s After creating the RAID set(s), you must initialize the logical drives. You may initialize the logical drives of a RAID set(s) using the Initialize or Objects command on the Management Menu. U s i n g t h e I n i t i a l i z e c o m m a n d To initialize the logical drive using the Initialize command: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Initialize, then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to initialize. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 1 9 3. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. You may also press <F10> to initialize the drive without conï¬Ârmation. Initializing a logical drive(s) erases all data on the drive. 4. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization.
5 - 2 0 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>. U s i n g t h e O b j e c t s c o m m a n d To initialize the logical drives using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Objects, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 2 1 2. Select Logical Drive from the Objects sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 3. Select the logical drive to initialize from the Logical Drives sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 4. Select Initialize from the pop-up menu, then press <Enter> to start initialization.
5 - 2 2 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. You may also press <F10> to initialize the drive without conï¬Ârmation. 6. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization. 7. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 2 3 5 . 2 . 5 R e b u i l d i n g f a i l e d d r i v e s You can manually rebuild failed hard disk drives using the Rebuild command in the Management Menu. To rebuild a failed hard disk drive: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Rebuild, then press <Enter>. 2. The PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SATA ports. Select the drive you want to rebuild, then press <SpaceBar>.
5 - 2 4 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 3. After selecting the drive to rebuild, press <F10>. The indicator for the selected drive now shows RBLD. 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to rebuild the drive. 5. When rebuild is complete, press any key to continue.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 2 5 5 . 2 . 6 C h e c k i n g t h e d r i v e s f o r d a t a c o n s i s t e n c y You can check and verify the accuracy of data redundancy in the selected logical drive. The utility can automatically detect and/or detect and correct any differences in data redundancy depending on the selected option in the Objects > Adapter menu. The Check Consistency command is available only for logical drives included in a RAID 1 set. U s i n g t h e C h e c k C o n s i s t e n c y To check data consistency using the Check Consistency command: 1. From the Management Menu, select Check Consistency, then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to check. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <Enter>.
5 - 2 6 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 3. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Consistency Check dialog box, then press <Enter>. You may also press <F10> to check the drive consistency. A progress bar appears on screen. 4. While checking the disk consistency, press <Esc> to display the following options. ⢠Stop - Stops the consistency check. The utility stores the percentage of disk checked. When you restart checking, it continues from the last percentage completed rather than from zero percent. ⢠Continue - Continues the consistency check. ⢠Abort - Aborts the consistency check. When you restart checking, it continues from zero percent. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 2 7 U s i n g t h e O b j e c t s c o m m a n d To check data consistency using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects, then select Logical Drive from the menu. 2. Use the arrow keys to select the logical dri ve you want to check, then press <Enter>. 3 . Se le ct C he ck C on si st en cy f ro m th e po p- up m en u, t he n pr es s <E nt er >. 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to check the drive. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue.
5 - 2 8 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 2 . 7 D e l e t i n g a R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n To delete a RAID conï¬Âguration: 1. From the Management Menu, select Conï¬Âgure > Clear Conï¬Âguration, then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Clear Conï¬Âguration? dialog box, then press <Enter>. The utility clears the current array. 3. Press any key to continue.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 2 9 5 . 2 . 8 S e l e c t i n g t h e b o o t d r i v e f r o m a R A I D s e t You must have created a new RAID conï¬Âguration before you can select the boot drive from a RAID set. Refer to the Creating a RAID set: Using New Conï¬Âguration section for details. To select the boot drive from a RAID set: 1. From the Management Menu, select Conï¬Âgure > Select Boot Drive, then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select the bootable logical drive from the list, then press <Enter>. 3. The logical drive is selected as boot drive. Press any key to continue.
5 - 3 0 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 2 . 9 E n a b l i n g t h e W r i t e C a c h e You may enable the RAID controllerüs WriteCache option to improve the data transmission performance. Wh en yo u en abl e W rite Cac he, y ou ma y l os e da ta whe n a pow er in ter ru pti on oc cur s whi le tra nsm itt in g o r exc ha ngi ng da ta amo ng the dri ves . To enable WriteCache: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects > Adapter, then press <Enter> to display the adapter properties. 2. Select WriteCache, then press <Enter> to turn the option On (enabled). 5.3 Global Array Manager You may also create a RAID set(s) in Windows î operating environment using the Global Array Manager (GAM) application. The GAM application is available from the motherboard support CD. 3. When ï¬Ânished, press any key to continue. Refer to the GAM user guide in the motherboard support CD for details.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 3 1 5.4 Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility The Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 10 set(s) from SCSI hard disk drives connected to the SCSI connector supported by the embedded Adaptec î SCSI controller. To enter the Adaptec SCSISelect(TM) Utility: 1. Turn on the system after installing all the SCSI hard disk drives. 2. During POST, the Adaptec SCSI BIOS automatically detects the installed SCSI hard disk drives and displays any existing RAID set(s). Press <Ctrl> <A> to enter the utility. 3. The utility auto-detects the available SCSI channels. Select the SCSI channel, then press <Enter>.
5 - 3 2 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 4 . 1 C o n f i g u r i n g t h e S C S I c o n t r o l l e r You need to conï¬Âgure the SCSI controller before creating a RAID set. After selecting the SCSI channel to use, the utility prompts you to select from the available options. Use the arrow keys to select Conï¬Âgure/View SCSI Controller Settings, then press <Enter>. 5 . 4 . 2 E n a b l i n g t h e H o s t R A I D c o n t r o l l e r To enable the Adaptec HostRAID controller: 1. Use the arrow keys to select the HostRAID item in the Conï¬Âguration section. 2. Press <Enter> to set the item to Enabled. 3. Press <Esc> to exit. 4. When the utility prompts you to save the changes, select Yes, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 3 3 5 . 4 . 3 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 0 s e t ( S t r i p e ) To create a RAID 0 set for Performance: 1. After enabling the HostRAID, the utility returns to the initial menu. Use the arrow keys to select Conï¬Âgure/View HostRAID Settings, then press <Enter>. The screen returns to the options menu.
5 - 3 4 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 3. Select RAID-0 (High Performance, No Fault Tolerance) from the Select RAID Type menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the Striping Requirements note at the bottom of the screen to determine the number of hard disk drives required for the selected RAID type. 2. The utility displays the installed SCSI hard disk drives status and menu options. When available, the HDD status shows Free. Press <C>. The utility does not display an installed SCSI HDD(s) with an existing RAID conï¬Âguration or is part of an existing RAID set. Use the SCSI Disk Utilities to reformat the HDD(s), or use the previous RAID card to clear the RAID conï¬Âguration on the HDD(s).
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 3 5 4. Use the arrow keys to select a RAID set member, then press <SpaceBar> to mark. An X mark appears after the selected HDD. 5. Follow step 4 to select other members of the RAID set, then press <Enter> when ï¬Ânished. 6. Select the stripe size from the menu, then press <Enter>. For server sys tems, we r ecommen d that you use a low er arr ay b lock si ze. For multim edia compu ter systems used main ly for aud io and vid eo edit ing, we r ecomme nd a higher array blo ck siz e fo r opti mum perform ance. 7. When prompted, use the keyboard to assign a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>.
5 - 3 6 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 10. The screen displays the information on the created RAID set. Press <Esc> to exit the utility. 8. If you want to make the array bootable, select Yes from the menu, then press <Enter>. 9. When prompted to create the RAID 0 set, select <Yes>, then press <Enter>. A Build Complete message appears to indicate that you have successfully created the RAID 0 set. The utility erases all data from the selected hard disk drives. Make sure to backup all important data before creating a RAID set.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 3 7 5 . 4 . 4 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 1 s e t ( M i r r o r ) To create a RAID 1 set for Fault Tolerance: 1. Follow steps 1 to 2 of the Creating a RAID 0 set section. 2. Select RAID-1 (Fault Tolerance) from the Select RAID Type menu, then press <Enter>. 3. Use the arrow keys to select a RAID set member, then press <SpaceBar> to mark. An X mark appears after the selected HDD. 4. Follow step 3 to select the other members of the RAID set, then press <Enter> when ï¬Ânished. Refer to the Mirroring Requirements note at the bottom of the screen to determine the number of hard disk drives required for the selected RAID type.
5 - 3 8 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 6. Select Create new RAID-1 from the RAID-1 Build Option menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the options description below. 7. When prompted, use the keyboard to assign a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 8. If you want to make the array bootable, select Yes from the menu, then press <Enter>. 9. When prompted to create the RAID 1 set, select <Yes>, then press <Enter>. The utility erases all data from the selected hard disk drives. Make sure to backup all important data before creating a RAID set. 10. When a conï¬Ârmation dialogue box appears, select <Yes>, then press <Enter>. ⢠Create a New RAID-1 - The default option. Select this option when creating a new RAID 1 set. ⢠Copy from ( 0) to ( 1) - Select this option when you want to copy the source drive contents to a target drive, provided that the source is equal to or smaller than the target drive. ⢠Copy from ( 1) to ( 0) - Select this option when you want to copy the source drive contents to a target drive, provided that the source is larger than the target drive.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 3 9 A Build Complete message appears to indicate that you have successfully created the RAID 1 set. 11. The utility builds the RAID 1 set and displays a progress bar at the center of the screen. Press <Esc> if you want to stop the building process. 12. The screen displays the information on the created RAID set. Press <Esc> to exit the utility.
5 - 4 0 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 4 . 5 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 1 0 s e t ( S t r i p e M i r r o r ) To create a RAID 10 set for Fault Tolerance and Performance: 1. After enabling the HostRAID, the utility returns to the initial menu. Use the arrow keys to select Conï¬Âgure/View HostRAID Settings, then press <Enter>. 2. The utility displays the SCSI hard disk drives installed in your computer and the menu options. Press <C>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 4 1 3. Select RAID-10 (Fault Tolerance, High Performance) from the Select RAID Type menu, then press <Enter>. 4. Use the arrow keys to select a RAID set member, then press <SpaceBar> to mark. An X mark appears after the selected HDD. 5. Follow the step 4 to select the other members of the RAID set, then press <Enter> when ï¬Ânished. Refer to the Striping/Mirroring Requirements note at the bottom of the screen to determine the number of hard disk drives required for the selected RAID type.
5 - 4 2 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 6. Select the stripe size from the menu, then press <Enter>. For server sys tems, we r ecommen d that you use a low er arr ay b lock si ze. For multim edia compu ter systems used main ly for aud io and vid eo edit ing, we r ecomme nd a higher array blo ck siz e fo r opti mum perform ance. 7. When prompted, use the keyboard to assign a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 8. If you want to make the array bootable, select Yes from the menu, then press <Enter>. 9. When prompted to create the RAID 10 set, select <Yes>, then press <Enter>. A Build Complete message appears to indicate that you have successfully created the RAID 10 set. The utility erases all data from the selected hard disk drives. Make sure to backup all important data before creating a RAID set.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 4 3 10. The screen displays the information on the created RAID set. Press <Esc> to exit the utility.
5 - 4 4 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 4 . 6 A d d i n g a s p a r e d r i v e t o a R A I D 1 0 s e t To add a spare drive to a RAID 10 set: 1. Press <S> from the Conï¬Âgure/View Host RAID Settings menu. 2. Select Add Spare from the Options menu, then press <Enter>. 3. Use the arrow keys to select the spare drive from the list, then press <Enter>. 4. When a conï¬Ârmation dialogue box appears, select <Yes>, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 4 5 5. The screen displays the information on the added spare drive. Press <Esc> to exit the utility. 5 . 4 . 7 D e l e t i n g a R A I D 1 0 s e t s p a r e d r i v e To delete a RAID 10 set spare drive: 1. From the utility main menu, press <S>, select Delete Spare from the Options menu, then press <Enter>.
5 - 4 6 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 3. When a conï¬Ârmation dialogue box appears, select <Yes>, then press <Enter> to delete the spare drive. 4. Press <ESC> to exit the utility. 2. The screen displays the available spare drive(s). Use the arrow keys to select the spare drive you want to delete, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 4 7 5 . 4 . 8 D e l e t i n g a R A I D s e t To delete a RAID set: 1. Press <D> from the Conï¬Âgure/View Host RAID Settings menu. 3. When prompted, select Yes from the Delete Array? menu, then press <Enter>. You lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID set. Make sure to backup all important data before deleting a RAID set. 4. Press <ESC> to exit the utility. 2. For RAID 0 and RAID 10 set, go to step 3. For a RAID 1 set, select a delete option from the menu (see below), then go to step 3. ⢠Drive ID 1 - Deletes all data on drive 1 ⢠Drive ID 2 - Deletes all data on drive 2 ⢠Drive ID 1 & 2 - Deletes all data on both drives ⢠None - Breaks the array but keeps all existing data on both drives
5 - 4 8 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 5 . 4 . 9 R e b u i l d i n g a R A I D s e t 2. Press <R>. The rebuild option is available only for RAID 1 and RAID 10 sets. To rebuild a RAID set: 1. From the main menu, select the RAID set you want to rebuild, then press <Enter>. While rebuilding the array, you can press <Esc> to stop. A pop-up menu appears for conï¬Ârmation. Select Yes to stop rebuilding and return to the main menu. A Build/Rebuild Completed message appears on screen to indicate that you have successfully rebuilt the array. 3. Press any key to return to the main menu.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 4 9 5 . 4 . 1 0 V e r i f y i n g a R A I D s e t h a r d d i s k d r i v e To verify a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. Select SCSI Disk Utilities from the main menu options, then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the RAID set drives. Use the arrow keys to select the hard disk drive you want to verify, then press <Enter>.
5 - 5 0 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n 3. Select Verify Disk Media from the menu, then press <Enter>. 4. After verifying the hard disk drive, press <Esc> to exit the utility. You can also use the SCSI Disk Utilities to format the hard disk drive. 5 . 4 . 1 1 M a k i n g a R A I D s e t b o o t a b l e To make a RAID set bootable: 1. Select SCSI Disk Utilities from the main menu options, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 5 - 5 1 2. Select the RAID set you want to make bootable, then press <Enter>. 4. When prompted, select Mark bootable, then press <Enter>. 3. Press <B> when the RAID set information displays on screen. The letter âÂÂBâ appears before a bootable RAID set for easy identiï¬Âcation.
5 - 5 2 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n
6 Driver installation This chapter provides instructions for installing the necessary drivers for different system components.
A S U S P 5 M T - S Chapter summary 6 6.1 RAID driver installation .......................................................... 6-1 6.2 LAN driver installation ........................................................ 6-11 6.3 VGA driver installation ........................................................ 6-13 6.4 Management applications and utilities installation .............. 6-15
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 1 6.1 RAID driver installation After creating the RAID sets for your server system, you are now ready to install an operating system to the independent hard disk drive or bootable array. This part provides instructions on how to install the RAID controller drivers during OS installation. 6 . 1 . 1 C r e a t i n g a R A I D d r i v e r d i s k You may have to use another system to create the RAID driver disk from the system/motherboard support CD or from the Internet. A ï¬Âoppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î 2000 or Red Hat î Enterprise ver. 3.0/SuSE operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. You can create a RAID driver disk in DOS (using the Makedisk application in the support CD). To create a RAID driver disk in DOS environment: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Restart the computer, then enter the BIOS Setup. 3. Select the optical drive as the ï¬Ârst boot priority to boot from the support CD. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. 4. Restart the computer. 5. Press any key when prompted to boot from CD. The Makedisk menu appears. Loading FreeDOS FAT KERNEL GO! Press any key to boot from CDROM... 6. Place a blank, high-density ï¬Âoppy disk to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then select the type of RAID driver disk you want to create by typing the number before the option 7. Press <Enter>. 8. Follow screen instructions to create the driver disk. For system s wi th Red Hat î Enterprise versions that are not listed in the Makedisk menu, explore the support CD and copy the RAID driver disk from the following path: \Drivers\ICH7R\LSI\Linux. A) Fre eD OS c omma nd p romp t B) Broadcom ASF Firmware Update C) Create 7901/7902 HostRAID for RHEL3UP6 Driver Disk D) Create 7901/7902 HostRAID for Windows Driver Disk E) Create 7901/7902 SCSI for Windows Driver Disk F) Create LSI ICH7R MegaRAID IDE Driver for Windows 32/64 bit Driver Disk G) Create LSI ICH7R MegaRAID IDE Driver for RHEL3UP6 driver H) Create ICH7R Intel Matrix Storage for Windows 32 bit driver disk I) Create ICH7R Intel Matrix Storage for Windows 64 bit driver disk Please choose A To I:
6 - 2 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6 . 1 . 2 I n s t a l l i n g t h e R A I D c o n t r o l l e r d r i v e r W i n d o w s î 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r O S During Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS installation To install the RAID controller driver when installing Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Boot the computer using the Windows î 2000/2003 Server installation CD. The Windows î 2000/2003 Setup starts. 2. Press <F6> when the message âÂÂPress F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver...â appears at the bottom of the screen. 3. When prompted, press <S> to specify an additional device.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 3 4. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. 5. Select the RAID controller driver from the list, then press <Enter>. ⢠For Intel î ICH7R LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID driver, select LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID. ⢠For Adaptec î AIC-7901X SCSI RAID driver, select Adaptec HostRAID U320 Driver ver. 1.02 for Windows 2000/XP/2003. 6. The Windows î 2000/2003 Setup loads the RAID controller drivers from the RAID driver disk. When prompted, press <Enter> to continue installation. 7. Setup then proceeds with the OS installation. Follow screen instructions to continue.
6 - 4 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5. Right-click the RAID controller item, then select Properties. 6. Click the Driver tab, then click the Update Driver button. 7. The Upgrade Device Driver Wizard window appears. Click Next. 8. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive. 9. Select the option âÂÂSearch for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)âÂÂ, then click Next. 10. The wizard searches the RAID controller drivers. When found, click Next to install the drivers. 11. Click Finish after the driver installation is done. To an existing Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS To install the RAID controller driver on an existing Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Restart the computer, then log in with Administrator privileges. 2. Windows î automatically detects the RAID controller and displays a New Hardware Found window. Click Cancel. 3. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows î desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 4. Click the Hardware tab then click the Device Manager button to display the list of devices installed in the system.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 5 To verify the RAID controller driver installation: 1. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows î desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 2. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button. 3. Click the â â sign before the item SCSI and RAID controllers. The LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID and Adaptec AIC-7901 - Ultra320 SCSI Driver items should appear. 4. Right-click the RAID controller driver item, then select Properties from the menu. 5. Click the Driver tab, then click the Driver Details button to display the RAID controller drivers. 6. Click OK when ï¬Ânished.
6 - 6 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n R e d H a t î E n t e r p r i s e v e r . 3 . 0 To install the Intel î ICH7R LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID controller driver when installing Red Hat î Enterprise ver. 3.0 operating system: 1. Boot the system from the Red Hat î Installation CD. 2. At the boot:, type linux dd , then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 7 4. Select fd0 using the <Tab> key when asked to select the driver disk source. Press <Tab> to move the cursor to OK, then press <Enter>. 3. Select Yes using the <Tab> key when asked if you have the driver disk. Press <Enter>
6 - 8 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6. When asked if you will load additional RAID controller drivers, select Yes, then install the additional RAID controller drivers (for Adaptec AIC-7901 PCI-X SCSI controller). 7. Follow screen instructions to continue the OS installation. 5. When prompted, insert the Red Hat î Enterprise ver. 3.0 RAID driver disk to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, select OK, then press <Enter>. The drivers for the RAID controller are installed to the system.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 9 S u S E L i n u x To install the RAID controller driver when installing SuSE Linux OS: 1. Boot the system from the SuSE Installation CD. 2. Select Installation from the Boot Options menu, then press <Enter>. 3. A message instructs you to prepare the RAID driver disk. Press <F6>. For SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9.0 SP1 operating system, locate the Adaptec SCSI RAID driver in support CD under the following path: \Drivers\adaptec\7901_7902\HostRAID\Linux. Do not use OS bundled driver, otherwise your computer may become unstable due to OS limitation.
6 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 4. When prompted, insert the RAID driver disk to the ï¬Âoppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. 5. When prompted, select the ï¬Âoppy disk drive (fd0) as the driver update medium, select OK, then press <Enter>. The drivers for the RAID controller are installed to the system.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 1 1 6.2 LAN driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the Broadcom î Gigabit LAN controller drivers. 6 . 2 . 1 W i n d o w s î 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r To install the Broadcom î Gigabit LAN controller driver on a Windows î 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Restart the computer, then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. ⢠Wi ndo ws î automatically detects the LAN controllers and displays a New Hardware Found window. Click Cancel to close this window. ⢠If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the ï¬Âle ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double-click the ASSETUP.EXE to run the CD. 3. Click the Broadcom Lan Driver option to begin installation.
6 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6 . 2 . 2 R e d H a t î E n t e r p r i s e v e r . 3 . 0 Follow these instructions when installing the Broadcom î Gigabit LAN controller base driver for the Red Hat î Enterprise ver. 3.0 operating system. B u i l d i n g t h e d r i v e r f r o m t h e T A R f i l e 4. Click Next when the InstallShield Wizard window appears. Follow screen instructions to continue installation. To build the driver from the TAR ï¬Âle: 1. Create a directory and extract the TAR ï¬Âles: tar xvzf bcm5700-<version>.tar.gz 2. Bui ld th e d riv er bcm 570 0.o as a loadab le mod ule fo r the runnin g kern el: cd bcm5700-<version>/src make 3. Test the driver by loading it: insmod bcm5700.o 4. Install the driver and man page: make install 5. Refer to Red Hat distribution documentation to conï¬Âgure the network protocol and address. Install ï¬Ârst the Kernel Development tools before building the driver from the TAR ï¬Âle.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 1 3 6.3 VGA driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the ATI î RAGE XL Video Graphics Adapter (VGA) driver. 6 . 3 . 1 W i n d o w s î 2 0 0 0 S e r v e r You need to manually install the ATI î RAGE XL VGA driver on a Windows î 2000 Server operating system. To install the ATI î RAGE XL VGA driver: 1. Restart the computer, then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The support CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. Windows î automatically detects the LAN controller and displays a New Hardware Found window. Click Cancel to close this window. 3. Cl ic k t he ite m A TI Ra ge XL Dis pla y Dr ive r f rom th e Dr ive rs men u. 4. The AT I Windows 2000 Driver window appears. Click Ne xt. Follow screen instructions to complete installation.
6 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6 . 3 . 2 W i n d o w s î 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r The Windows î 2003 Server operating system automatically recognizes the ATI î RAGE XL VGA driver during system installation. There is no need to install an additional driver(s) to support the onboard VGA. 6 . 3 . 3 R e d H a t î E n t e r p r i s e v e r . 3 . 0 The Red Hat î Enterprise ver. 3.0 operating system automatically recognizes the ATI î RAGE XL VGA driver during system installation. There is no need to install an additional driver(s) to support the onboard VGA.
A S U S P 5 M T - S 6 - 1 5 6.4 Management applications and utilities installation The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, management applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for updates. 6 . 4 . 1 R u n n i n g t h e s u p p o r t C D Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the ï¬Âle ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double- click the ASSETUP.EXE to run the CD. 6 . 4 . 2 D r i v e r s m e n u The Dr ive rs men u s how s t he ava ila ble de vic e d riv ers if th e s yst em det ect s ins tal led de vic es. In sta ll the ne ces sar y d riv ers to ac tiv ate th e d evi ces . The screen display and driver options vary under different operating system versions.
6 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6 . 4 . 3 M a n a g e m e n t S o f t w a r e m e n u The Management Software menu displays the available network and server monitoring applications. Click on an item to install. 6 . 4 . 4 U t i l i t i e s m e n u The Utilities menu displays the software applications and utilities that the motherboard supports. Click on an item to install. 6 . 4 . 5 C o n t a c t i n f o r m a t i o n Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. You can also ï¬Ând this information on the inside front cover of this user guide.
A Reference information This appendix includes additional information that you may refer to when conï¬Âguring the motherboard.
Appendix summary A A S U S P 5 M T - S A.1 Intel î EM64T ......................................................................... A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) .................... A-1 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ...................................... A-3 A.4 Block diagrams ...................................................................... A-4
A S U S P 5 M T - S A - 1 A.1 Intel î EM64T ⢠The motherboard is fully compatible with Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors running on 32-bit operating systems. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS ï¬Âle that supports EM64T. You can download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle from the ASUS website (www.asus. com/support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS ï¬Âle. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www.intel.com for more information on the EM64T feature. ⢠Vi sit w ww. mi cros oft .co m fo r m ore i nfo rm ati on on W indo ws î 64-bit OS. U s i n g t h e I n t e l î E M 6 4 T f e a t u r e To use the Intel î EM64T feature: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Intel î EM64T. 2. Install a 64-bit operating system (Windows î Server 2003 x64 Edition). 3. Install the 64-bit drivers for the motherboard components and devices from the support CD. 4. Install the 64-bit drivers for expansion cards or add-on devices, if any. A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS ï¬Âle that supports EIST. You can download the latest BIOS ï¬Âle from the ASUS website (www. asus.com/support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www.intel.com for more information on the EIST feature. A . 2 . 1 S y s t e m r e q u i r e m e n t s Before using EIST, check your system if it meets the following requirements: ⢠Inte l î Pentium î 4 processor with EIST support ⢠BIOS ï¬Âle with EIST support ⢠Operating system with EIST support (Windows î Server 2003 SP1/ Linux 2.6 kernel or later versions) Refe r to t he e xpansi on c ard or add-on dev ice(s) doc umenta tion , or vi sit the relate d we bsite, to verify if the car d/devi ce s upport s a 64-bit sys tem.
A - 2 A p p e n d i x : C P U f e a t u r e s A . 2 . 2 U s i n g t h e E I S T To use the EIST feature: 1. Tu rn on th e c omp ute r, the n e nte r t he BIO S S etu p. 2. Go t o t he Adv anc ed Men u, hig hli ght CP U C onﬠgur ati on, then press <Enter>. 3. Set the In tel (R) Sp eed Ste p T ech nol ogy item to [Automatic], then press <Enter>. See page 4-20 for details. 4. Pr es s < F10 > t o s ave yo ur cha nge s a nd exi t t he BIO S s etu p. 5. After the computer restarts, right click on a blank space on the desktop, then select Pr ope rti es from the pop-up menu. 6. When the Di spl ay Pro per tie s window appears, click the Sc ree n Sa ver tab. 7. Click the Po wer button on the Monitor power section to open the Po wer Op tio ns Pro per tie s window. 8 . O n t h e Pow er sch eme s s e c t i o n , c l i c k , t he n s e le c t a ny o p t io n except Home/Ofï¬Âce Desktop or Always On. 9. Click Ap ply , then click OK. 10. Close the Dis pla y P rop ert ies window. Af ter yo u a dju st the po wer sc hem e, the CP U i nte rna l fr equ enc y s lig htl y d ecr eas es wh en the CP U l oad ing is lo w. The screen displays and procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
A S U S P 5 M T - S A - 3 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with Hyper-Threading Technology. ⢠Hy per -T hre ad ing Tec hno logy is su pp ort ed un de r 2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only. Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading Techonology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading Technology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading Technology, visit www. intel.com/info/hyperthreading. U s i n g t h e H y p e r - T h r e a d i n g T e c h n o l o g y To use the Hyper-Threading Technology: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup. Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading Technology is set to Enabled. Se e p age 4- 19 fo r d eta ils . The BIOS item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Techonology. 3. Restart the computer.
A - 4 A p p e n d i x : C P U f e a t u r e s A.4 Block diagrams Northbridge Intel î E7230 LPC-Bus PCI-E interfaces Four DDR2 533/667 DIMM Sockets DMI interface X8 PCI-E 4xDDR2 533/667 DIMM slots (max. 8 GB) SMBus BIOS Flash 8 Mbit USB 1-8 IDE SATA All H/W monitor W83792AD Fan Power Supply EEPROM System informatio n W83627EHG-A PS2 KB/MS Serial Port Floppy Parallel Port PCI Slot 4 PCI 33 bus VGA-Conn. PCI-X Slot 2 X4 PCI-E X1 PCI-E Broadcom BCM5721 LAN Port 1 X1 PCI-E Broadcom BCM575 1 LAN Port 2 PCI-E interfaces Intel î Pentiu m î 4 Pro cessor in the 775-land package with 800/1066 MHz system bus Southbridge Intel î ICH7R ATI Rage XL 8 Mbyte Mini PCI (BMC) PCI-X Slot 3 Intel PCI-X Hub-V (PXH-V) System Bus 64bit, 800 MHz/1066MHz PCIE Slot 1 Adaptec AIC-7901 U320 SCSI